Lexmark Scanner Xm3100 Users Manual User's Guide

Lexmark-Lexmark-Xm3150-Owner-S-Manual lexmark-lexmark-xm3150-owner-s-manual

XM3100 to the manual 13506927-1f14-4b74-941b-28f2823d88d3

2015-01-23

: Lexmark Lexmark-Lexmark-Scanner-Xm3100-Users-Manual-269312 lexmark-lexmark-scanner-xm3100-users-manual-269312 lexmark pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 350

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

XM3100 Series
User's Guide

September 2012
Machine type(s):
7016
Model(s):
679

www.lexmark.com

Contents

Contents
Safety information.......................................................................................8
Learning about the printer.........................................................................10
Finding information about the printer....................................................................................................10
Selecting a location for the printer..........................................................................................................11
Printer configurations.............................................................................................................................12
Using the Embedded Web Server...........................................................................................................14
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner..................................................................................15
Using the ADF and scanner glass.............................................................................................................15

Understanding the printer control panel....................................................16
Setting up and using the home screen applications....................................21
Finding the IP address of the computer..................................................................................................21
Finding the IP address of the printer.......................................................................................................22
Accessing the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................................................22
Customizing the home screen.................................................................................................................22
Understanding the different applications...............................................................................................23
Activating the home screen applications................................................................................................23
Finding information about the home screen applications................................................................................23
Setting up Forms and Favorites ........................................................................................................................23
Setting up Card Copy ........................................................................................................................................24
Using MyShortcut .............................................................................................................................................25
Setting up Multi Send .......................................................................................................................................25
Setting up Scan to Network ..............................................................................................................................26
Setting up Remote Operator Panel...................................................................................................................27

Exporting and importing a configuration................................................................................................27

Additional printer setup.............................................................................29
Installing internal options........................................................................................................................29
Available internal options .................................................................................................................................29
Accessing the controller board .........................................................................................................................30
Installing a memory card ..................................................................................................................................31
Installing an optional card ................................................................................................................................33
Installing an Internal Solutions Port..................................................................................................................35
Installing a printer hard disk .............................................................................................................................41
Removing a printer hard disk............................................................................................................................44

Contents

Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................45
Order of installation..........................................................................................................................................45
Installing optional trays ....................................................................................................................................45

Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................48
Installing the printer software ..........................................................................................................................48
Updating available options in the printer driver ..............................................................................................48

Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................49
Networking..............................................................................................................................................51
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network..................................................................................51
Installing the printer on an Ethernet network ..................................................................................................51
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network.....................................................................................53
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard.................................................................................54
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup ....................................................54
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server.............................................55
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port ................................................56
Setting up serial printing...................................................................................................................................57

Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................59
Printing a menu settings page ..........................................................................................................................59
Printing a network setup page..........................................................................................................................59

Loading paper and specialty media............................................................60
Setting the paper size and type...............................................................................................................60
Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................60
Loading trays...........................................................................................................................................60
Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................................................65
Using the standard bin and paper stop...................................................................................................70
Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................71
Linking and unlinking trays ...............................................................................................................................71
Creating a custom name for a paper type ........................................................................................................71
Assigning a custom paper type .........................................................................................................................72
Configuring a custom name..............................................................................................................................72

Paper and specialty media guide................................................................74
Using specialty media..............................................................................................................................74
Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................76
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................79

Printing......................................................................................................84
Printing forms and a document...............................................................................................................84
Printing from a mobile device.................................................................................................................85

Contents

Printing from a flash drive.......................................................................................................................85
Printing confidential and other held jobs................................................................................................87
Printing information pages......................................................................................................................89
Canceling a print job................................................................................................................................89

Copying......................................................................................................91
Making copies.........................................................................................................................................91
Copying photos........................................................................................................................................92
Copying on specialty media.....................................................................................................................92
Customizing copy settings.......................................................................................................................93
Placing information on copies.................................................................................................................99
Canceling a copy job................................................................................................................................99
Understanding the copy options...........................................................................................................100

E-mailing..................................................................................................102
Setting up the printer to e-mail.............................................................................................................102
Creating an e-mail shortcut...................................................................................................................103
E-mailing a document............................................................................................................................104
Customizing e-mail settings...................................................................................................................105
Canceling an e-mail...............................................................................................................................106
Understanding the e-mail options........................................................................................................106

Faxing......................................................................................................109
Setting up the printer to fax..................................................................................................................109
Sending a fax.........................................................................................................................................123
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................126
Customizing fax settings........................................................................................................................127
Canceling an outgoing fax.....................................................................................................................128
Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................128
Understanding the fax options..............................................................................................................129

Scanning...................................................................................................132
Using Scan to Network..........................................................................................................................132
Scanning to an FTP address...................................................................................................................132
Scanning to a computer or flash drive..................................................................................................134
Understanding the scan options...........................................................................................................137

Contents

Understanding the printer menus............................................................140
Menus list..............................................................................................................................................140
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................141
Reports Menu........................................................................................................................................151
Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................152
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................161
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................166
Help menu.............................................................................................................................................210

Saving money and the environment.........................................................212
Saving paper and toner.........................................................................................................................212
Using recycled paper ......................................................................................................................................212
Conserving supplies ........................................................................................................................................212

Saving energy........................................................................................................................................213
Using Eco‑Mode..............................................................................................................................................213
Reducing printer noise....................................................................................................................................213
Adjusting Sleep mode .....................................................................................................................................214
Using Hibernate Mode....................................................................................................................................215
Setting Hibernate Timeout .............................................................................................................................215
Using Schedule Power Modes ........................................................................................................................216
Adjusting the brightness of the display ..........................................................................................................216

Recycling................................................................................................................................................217
Recycling Lexmark products ...........................................................................................................................217
Recycling Lexmark packaging..........................................................................................................................217
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling......................................................................................217

Securing the printer..................................................................................219
Statement of Volatility..........................................................................................................................219
Erasing volatile memory........................................................................................................................219
Erasing non‑volatile memory................................................................................................................220
Erasing printer hard disk memory.........................................................................................................220
Configuring printer hard disk encryption..............................................................................................221
Finding printer security information.....................................................................................................222

Maintaining the printer............................................................................223
Cleaning the printer parts.....................................................................................................................223
Cleaning the printer ........................................................................................................................................223
Cleaning the scanner glass..............................................................................................................................224

Checking the status of parts and supplies.............................................................................................225

Contents

Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel......................................................... 225
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server .................................................225

Ordering supplies..................................................................................................................................225
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies.....................................................................................................225
Ordering a toner cartridge..............................................................................................................................225
Ordering an imaging unit ................................................................................................................................226
Ordering staple cartridges ..............................................................................................................................226
Ordering a maintenance kit ............................................................................................................................226
Ordering an ADF separator roller ...................................................................................................................226

Estimated number of remaining pages.................................................................................................227
Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................227
Replacing supplies.................................................................................................................................227
Replacing the toner cartridge .........................................................................................................................227
Replacing the imaging unit .............................................................................................................................229
Replacing the staple cartridge ........................................................................................................................231

Moving the printer................................................................................................................................233
Before moving the printer ..............................................................................................................................233
Moving the printer to another location..........................................................................................................234
Shipping the printer ........................................................................................................................................234

Managing the printer...............................................................................235
Finding advanced networking and administrator information.............................................................235
Checking the virtual display...................................................................................................................235
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................235
Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................235
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server.......................................................236
Restoring factory default settings.........................................................................................................237

Clearing jams............................................................................................238
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................238
Understanding jam messages and locations.........................................................................................239
[x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx].....................................................................241
[x]‑page jam, clear standard bin. [20y.xx].............................................................................................241
[x]‑page jam, open rear door. [20y.xx]..................................................................................................242
[x]‑page jam, open front door. [20y.xx]................................................................................................243
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx]...........................................................................246
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder. [25y.xx]..........................................................................................247
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24y.xx].....................................................................................................249
[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the output bin. Leave paper in bin. [45y.xx]...............................250
[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the finisher’s accumulator. Leave paper in bin. [45y.xx]............255

Contents

Troubleshooting.......................................................................................259
Understanding the printer messages....................................................................................................259
Solving printer problems.......................................................................................................................273
Solving print problems..........................................................................................................................280
Solving copy problems..........................................................................................................................305
Solving fax problems.............................................................................................................................309
Solving scanner problems.....................................................................................................................315
Solving home screen applications problems.........................................................................................320
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................320
Contacting customer support................................................................................................................321

Notices.....................................................................................................322
Product information..............................................................................................................................322
Edition notice........................................................................................................................................322
Power consumption..............................................................................................................................326

Index........................................................................................................339

Safety information

Safety information
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:

• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the
right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.

• Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when
connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.

Safety information

Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Learning about the printer

Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for?

Find it here

Initial setup instructions:

Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.

• Connecting the printer
• Installing the printer software
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
Loading paper
Configuring printer settings

User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides are
available on the Documentation CD.
For more information, visit
http://support.lexmark.com.

Viewing and printing documents and photos
Setting up and using the printer software
Configuring the printer on a network
Caring for and maintaining the printer
Troubleshooting and solving problems

Instructions for:

• Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network
• Troubleshooting printer connection problems
Help using the printer software

Networking Guide—Open the Software CD, and then look
for Printer and Software Documentation under the Pubs
folder. From the list of publications, click the Networking
Guide link.
Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program
or application, and then click Help.
Click

to view context‑sensitive information.

Notes:

• Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.

• The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.

Learning about the printer

What are you looking for?

Find it here

The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:

Lexmark Support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com

•
•
•
•
•

Documentation

Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.

Driver downloads

Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the Support Web
site or on the printed warranty that came with your
printer.

Live chat support
E‑mail support
Voice support

Record the following information (located on the store
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready
when you contact customer support so that they may
serve you faster:

•
•
•
•
Warranty information

Machine Type number
Serial number
Date purchased
Store where purchased

Warranty information varies by country or region:

• In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty
included with this printer, or at
http://support.lexmark.com.

• In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with your printer.

Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:

• Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.

• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Clean, dry, and free of dust.
– Away from stray staples and paper clips.
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
– Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
• Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature

‑40 to 60°C (-40 to 140°F)

• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:

Learning about the printer

Right side 304.8 mm (12 in.)

Front

508 mm (20 in.)

Left side

203.2 mm (8 in.)

Rear

203.2 mm (8 in.)

Top

800 mm (31.49 in.)

Printer configurations
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

Learning about the printer

Basic model
2

3
4

5
7

6
1

Display

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

ADF tray

ADF bin

Standard bin

Multipurpose feeder

Standard 550‑sheet tray

Learning about the printer

Configured model

3
2

Optional 250‑sheet tray

Optional 550‑sheet tray

Optional stapler

Using the Embedded Web Server
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
If the printer is installed on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to do the following:

•
•
•
•
•
•

View the virtual display of the printer control panel.
Check the status of the printer supplies.
Configure supply notifications.
Configure printer settings.
Configure network settings.
View reports.

To access the Embedded Web Server for your printer:

1 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Notes:

– An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
– If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Learning about the printer

3 Press Enter.
The Embedded Web Server page appears.

Understanding the basic functions of the scanner
•
•
•
•
•

Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.
Send a fax using the printer control panel.
Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, or an FTP destination.
Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).

Using the ADF and scanner glass
Scanner glass

AB
C

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided (duplex) pages.

Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book pages, small
items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper,
or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Using the ADF
When using the ADF:

•
•
•
•
•

Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge first.
Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.
Scan sizes from 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 inches) wide to 216 x 368 mm (8.5 x 14.5 inches) long.
Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14–32 lb).
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)
into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Using the scanner glass
When using the scanner glass:

• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
• Scan or copy documents up to 216 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) long.
• Copy books up to 25.3 mm (1 inch) thick.

Understanding the printer control panel

Understanding the printer control panel
Using the printer control panel
2

Use the

Printer control panel

Home button

Go to the home screen.

Sleep button

Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.

• View the printer status and messages.
• Set up and operate the printer.

Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode:

•
•
•
•
•

Press any hard button.
Open a door or cover.
Send a print job from the computer.
Perform a power‑on reset (POR) with the main power switch.
Attach a device to the USB port on the printer.

Keypad

Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.

Indicator light

Check the status of the printer.

Start button

Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.

Cancel button

Stop all printer activity.

Clear All / Reset button Reset the default settings of a function, such as printing, copying, or e-mailing.

Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator
lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition.

Understanding the printer control panel

Indicator light color and its corresponding printer status
Indicator light

Printer status

Off

The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.

Blinking green

The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.

Solid green

The printer is on, but idle.

Blinking red

The printer requires user intervention.

Sleep button light color and its corresponding printer status
Sleep button light

Printer status

Off

The printer is off, idle or in Ready state.

Solid amber

The printer is in Sleep mode.

Blinking amber

The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.

Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes
completely off for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern

The printer is in Hibernate mode.

Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to
messages.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded solutions.
1

6
14
7
13

8
12 11

Touch

Change Language

Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that lets you change the primary language of
the printer.

Copy

Access the Copy menus and make copies.

Fax

Access the Fax menus and send fax.

E-mail

Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.

Understanding the printer control panel

Touch

FTP

Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.

Arrows

Scroll up or down.

Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms.

Menu icon

Access the printer menus.
Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.

Bookmarks

Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any
other application.

USB Drive

View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or
flash drive is connected to the printer.

Held Jobs

Status/Supplies

Display all current held jobs.

• Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue
processing.

• Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.
13

Tips

Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.

Search held jobs

Search for one or more of the following items:

•
•
•
•
•

User name for held or confidential print jobs
Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
Profile names
Bookmark container or print job names
USB container or print job names for supported file types

Features
Feature

Description

Menu trail line

A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the
path taken to arrive at the current menu.

Example:
Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >
Number of Copies

Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen. If you touch an
underlined word on the “Number of Copies” screen before the number of copies is
set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default
setting.

Attendance message alert

If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.

Understanding the printer control panel

Feature

Description

Warning

If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.

Status message bar

• Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
• Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
• Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.

Printer IP address

The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of the
home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can
use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and
remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the
printer.

Example:
123.123.123.123

Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.

Touch

Arrows

View a list of options.

Copy It

Print a copy.

Advanced Options Select a copy option.

Home

Go to the home screen.

Increase

Select a higher value.

Decrease

Select a lower value.

Tips

Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.

Understanding the printer control panel

Other touch-screen buttons
Touch

Save a setting.

Cancel

Reset

• Cancel an action or a selection.
• Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.

Reset values on the screen.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:

• Your home screen may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active applications. Some applications are supported only in select printer models.

• There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, visit
www.lexmark.com or inquire at your point of purchase.

Finding the IP address of the computer
Note: Make sure that you know how your printer and computer are connected to the network (Ethernet or
wireless).
The computer IP address is required when setting up home screen applications, such as:

• Forms and Favorites
• Multi Send
• Scan to Network

For Windows users
1 Open the command window.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type cmd > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type cmd.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Type ipconfig, and then click Go or press Enter.
Note: Type ipconfig /all to see additional useful information.

3 Look for IP Address.
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

For Macintosh users
Note: This is applicable only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or later.

1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Network

2 Click Ethernet, Wi‑Fi, or AirPort.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

3 Click Advanced > TCP/IP.
4 Look for IPv4 Address.

Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:

• From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.

1 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the printer control panel home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3 Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

Customizing the home screen
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Do one or more of the following:
• Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.
a Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home screen.

c Click Submit.
• Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home screen
applications” on page 23 or see the documentation that came with the application.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Understanding the different applications
Use

Card Copy

Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page. For more information, see “Setting up Card Copy”
on page 24.

Fax

Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see “Faxing” on page
109.

Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen. For more
information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 23.
Multi Send

Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see “Setting up
Multi Send” on page 25.

MyShortcut

Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen. For more information, see “Using MyShortcut”
on page 25.

Scan to E‑mail

Scan a document, and then send it to an e‑mail address. For more information, see “E-mailing” on
page 102.

Scan to Computer

Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more information,
see “Setting up Scan to Computer” on page 135.

Scan to FTP

Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. For more information, see “Scanning
to an FTP address” on page 132.

Scan to Network

Scan a document, and then send it to a network shared folder. For more information, see “Setting
up Scan to Network” on page 26.

Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first
activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the
Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 22.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:

1 Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then do either of the following:
• Click Business Solutions, and then select the name of the application.
• Click Software and Solutions, and then select either of the following:
– Scan to Network—Find information about the Scan to Network application.
– Other Applications—Find information about the other applications.
2 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.

Setting up Forms and Favorites
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Use

To
Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly
from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that
came with your operating system.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3 Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:

• See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host
computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 21.

• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.

Setting up Card Copy
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use

To
Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet‑size cards.
You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the information
on the card in a more convenient manner.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

3 Change the default scanning options, if necessary.
• Default tray—Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.
• Default number of copies—Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the application
is used.

• Default contrast setting—Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy of the
scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast automatically.

• Default scale setting—Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full size).
• Resolution setting—Adjust the quality of the scanned card.
Notes:

– When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and 400 dpi for
black and white.
– When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color, and
300 dpi for black and white.

• Print Borders—Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.

Using MyShortcut
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use

To
Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax, or email jobs.

To use the application, touch MyShortcut, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.

Setting up Multi Send
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use

To
Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.
Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send.
3 From the Profiles section, click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:

• See the mouse‑over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the destination are
correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For
more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the
computer” on page 21.

4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer
display.

Setting up Scan to Network
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use

To
Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder
destinations.
Notes:

• The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the
destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.

• The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network.
3 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
Notes:

• See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of
the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 21.

• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.
4 Click Apply.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.

Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control
panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer
status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing
at the network printer.

2 Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3 Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.

Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers.

2 To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:
a Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
b From the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
c Click Configure, and then do either of the following:
• To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to
save the configuration file.
Notes:

– When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
– If a "JVM Out of Memory” error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is
saved.

• To import a configuration from a file, click Import, and then browse to the saved configuration file that was
exported from a previously configured printer.
Notes:

– Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
– If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

3 To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:
a Click Settings > Import/Export.
b Do either of the following:
• To export a configuration file, click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the instructions
on the computer screen to save the configuration file.

• To import a configuration file, do the following:
1 Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File, and then browse to the saved configuration
file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
2 Click Submit.

Additional printer setup

Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Available internal options
• Memory card
– DDR3 DIMM
– Flash memory
• Fonts
• Firmware
Forms Barcode
Prescribe
IPDS
Printcryption

• Printer hard disk
• LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
– Parallel 1284‑B interface
– MarkNet N8130 10/100 fiber interface
– MarkNet N8350 802.11 b/g/n Wireless Print Server
– RS‑232‑C serial interface

Additional printer setup

Accessing the controller board
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

1 Open the controller board access door.

2 Open the controller board shield using the green handle.

3 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.

Additional printer setup

Memory card connector

Option card connector

Printer hard disk connector

Lexmark Internal Solutions Port connector

4 Close the shield, and then the access door.

1
2

Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
Note: An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board.

1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 30.

2 Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may
cause damage.

Additional printer setup

3 Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.

1
2

4 Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall until
it clicks into place.

5 Close the controller board shield, and then the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
available options in the printer driver” on page 48.

Additional printer setup

Installing an optional card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them
off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controler board electronic components or connectors.

1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 30.

2 Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.

3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.
2
1

Additional printer setup

4 Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.

Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller board.

5 Close the controller board shield, and then the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add
the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
available options in the printer driver” on page 48.

Additional printer setup

Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

1 Open the controller board access door.

Additional printer setup

2 Lightly press the stop on the left side of the controller board access door, and then slide the access door to remove.

1
2

3 Unpack the ISP kit.
Note: Make sure to remove and discard the small cable attached to the white connector.
1
6
2

3
5

ISP solution

Screw to attach the ISP to the bracket

ISP exterior cover

Screws to attach the ISP metal bracket to the printer cage

Plastic bracket

Long ISP cable

Additional printer setup

4 Place the plastic bracket inside the ISP exterior cover until it clicks into place.

5 Slide and push the ISP solution into the plastic bracket.

1
6 Secure the ISP solution to the plastic bracket using the long screw.

Additional printer setup

7 Tighten the two screws on the end of the ISP solution.

8 Attach the white plug of the ISP solution interface cable into the white receptacle on the ISP.

Additional printer setup

9 Slightly close the ISP exterior cover up to 65 degrees, and then slide the cover to attach.

10 Run the ISP cable through the controller board shield.

Additional printer setup

11 Open the controller board shield using the green handle.

12 Attach the blue plug of the ISP solution interface cable into the blue receptacle on the controller board.
Note: If you have installed a printer hard disk, then you need to remove it. For more information, see
“Removing a printer hard disk” on page 44. To reinstall the printer hard disk, see “Installing a printer hard
disk” on page 41.

Additional printer setup

13 Close the controller board shield.

14 Close the ISP exterior cover.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available
options in the printer driver” on page 48.

Installing a printer hard disk
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 30.

2 Unpack the printer hard disk.
3 Install the printer hard disk on the controller board.
Warning—Potential Damage: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press
on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.

Additional printer setup

a Using a flathead screwdriver, loosen the screws.

b Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The plug and the receptacle are color‑coded blue.

Additional printer setup

c Align the screws on the printer hard disk to the slots on the controller board bracket, and then slide the printer
hard disk onto the brackets.

d Tighten the two screws.

4 Close the controller board shield, and then close the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
available options in the printer driver” on page 48.

Additional printer setup

Removing a printer hard disk
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 30.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

2 Loosen the screws that connect the printer hard disk to the controller board bracket.

3 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the receptacle in the controller board , leaving the cable attached
to the printer hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the
latch before pulling the cable out.

4 Hold the printer hard disk by the edges, and then remove it from the printer.
5 Close the controller board shield, and then close the access door.

Additional printer setup

Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor‑mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high‑capacity tray and an input option, or more than
one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need
additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order:

• Printer stand
• Optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray
• Printer
For more information on installing a printer stand, optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray, or spacer, see the setup sheet that
came with the option.

Installing optional trays
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity tray and an input option, or more than
one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need
additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

1 Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

Additional printer setup

2 Unpack the tray, and then remove all packing material.
3 Pull out the tray from the base.

4 Remove any packing material from inside the tray.
5 Insert the tray into the base.
6 Place the tray near the printer.
7 Align the printer with the tray, and then slowly lower the printer into place.
Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked.

Additional printer setup

8 Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

Notes:

• When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
available options in the printer driver” on page 48.

• To uninstall the optional trays, slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer
until it clicks into place, and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the bottom.

Additional printer setup

Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer software
Notes:

• If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall
the current software first.

• Close all open software programs before installing the printer software.
• For Macintosh users, you may download all the drivers and utilities from our Web site.
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software CD that came with your printer
• From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system

2 Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:

In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK.

In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Updating available options in the printer driver
When any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make
them available for use.

For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK

Additional printer setup

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Depending on your device, do either of the following:
• Press and hold the printer you want to update.
• Right‑click the printer you want to update.
3 From the menu that appears, do either of the following:
• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
• For earlier versions, select Properties.
4 Click the Configuration tab.
5 Do either of the following:
• Click Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
• Under Configuration Options, manually add any installed hardware options.
6 Click Apply.

For Macintosh users
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
• System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
2 Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.

Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or to the network using an Ethernet cable.
Make sure to match the following:

• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
• The appropriate Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown
while actively printing or scanning. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.

Additional printer setup

7
6
5

Use the

Printer power cord
socket

Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Power switch

Turn the printer on or off.

Ethernet port

Connect the printer to an Ethernet network.

EXT port

Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and the
telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the printer and if this
connection method is supported in your country or region.
Note: Remove the adapter plug to access the port.

LINE port

Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack (RJ‑11), DSL filter,
or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access the telephone line to send
and receive faxes.

USB port

Attach a supported printer keyboard.

USB printer port

Connect the printer to a computer.

Security slot

Attach a lock that will secure the printer in place.

Additional printer setup

Networking
Notes:

• Purchase a MarkNetTM N8350 wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless network.
For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the instruction sheet that came with the
adapter.

• A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi
Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, and 802.1X-RADIUS are types of security used on a network.

Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the
printer.

•
•
•
•

A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
The network gateway
The network mask
A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to
use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.

You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can
physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a
damaged cable.

Installing the printer on an Ethernet network
For Windows users
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software CD that came with your printer
• From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system

2 Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK

Additional printer setup

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4 Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.
5 Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so.
6 Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.
Note: If the configured printer does not appear in the list, then click Modify Search.

7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
For Macintosh users
1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2 Obtain the printer IP address either:
• From the printer control panel
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.

3 Install the printer driver on the computer.
a Download the driver at http://support.lexmark.com.
b Double‑click the installer package for the printer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
c Select a destination, and then click Continue.
d From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
e Type the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary applications are installed on the computer.

f Click Close when installation is complete.
4 Add the printer.
• For IP printing:
a From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
– System Preferences > Print & Scan
– System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +.
c Click the IP tab.
d Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
• For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:

– Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.

Additional printer setup

– This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.
a From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax

b Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select your printer > Add

Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:

• Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:

• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are
not sure which channel to select.

• Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.

– WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.

– 802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:

•
•
•
•

Authentication type
Inner authentication type
802.1X user name and password
Certificates

– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:

– If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point, or contact
your system support person.

Additional printer setup

– To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your
system support person.

Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard
Before you begin, make sure that:

• A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

• An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
• Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto > Submit
Note: Make sure to turn off the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup

2 Select a wireless connection setup.
Use

Search for networks

Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.

Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.
Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.

3 Follow the instructions on the printer display.

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Before you begin, make sure that:

• The access point (wireless router) is Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your access point.

• A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information, see
the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

Using the Push Button Configuration method
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start Push Button
Method

2 Follow the instructions on the printer display.

Additional printer setup

Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start PIN Method

2 Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.
3 Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.
Notes:

• The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4 Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
5 Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server
Before you begin, make sure that:

• Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
• A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network mode, and
channel.

4 Click Submit.
5 Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.

6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x]
section, see if the status is Connected.

Additional printer setup

Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port
When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on computers
that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access
the printer must be updated with this new IP address.
Notes:

• If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
• If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to
make any changes to your computer configurations.

• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure
the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If
the printer is connected to the Ethernet network, then the wireless configuration completes, but the wireless
ISP is inactive. To activate the wireless ISP, disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network, turn off the
printer, and then turn it back on.

• Only one network connection is active at a time. To switch between Ethernet and wireless connection types,
turn off the printer, connect the cable (to switch to an Ethernet connection) or disconnect the cable (to switch
to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer back on.

For Windows users
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type Run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click
, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
3 To select the printer that has changed, do either of the following:
• Press and hold the printer, and then select Printer properties.
• Right‑click the printer, and then select Printer properties (Windows 7 or later) or Properties (earlier versions).
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.

4 Click the Ports tab.
5 Select the port from the list, and then click Configure Port.

Additional printer setup

6 Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field.
7 Click OK > Close.
For Macintosh users
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Add the printer.
• For IP printing:
a From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
– System Preferences > Print & Scan
– System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +.
c Click the IP tab.
d Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
• For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:

– Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
– This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.
a From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer > Add

Setting up serial printing
Use serial printing to print when the computer is far from the printer or to print at a reduced speed.
After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the printer and the computer. Make sure you have
connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer.

1 Set the parameters in the printer.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
b Locate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
c Save the modified settings, and then print a menu settings page.
2 Install the printer driver.
a Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software CD that came with your printer
• From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system

Additional printer setup

b Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:

In Windows 8
From the Search charm type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier
1 Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
3 Press Enter or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

c
d
e
f
g

Click Install.
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Select Advanced, and then click Continue.
From the Configure Printer Connection dialog, select a port.
If the port is not in the list, then click Refresh or navigate to:
Add port > select a port type > enter the necessary information > OK

h Click Continue > Finish.
3 Set the COM port parameters.
After installing the printer driver, set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver.
Note: Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer.

a Open Device Manager.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type devmgmt.msc > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier
1 Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run dialog, type devmgmt.msc.
3 Press Enter or click OK.
b Double‑click Ports (COM & LPT) to expand the list of available ports.
c Do either of the following:
• Press and hold the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
• Right‑click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
d Click Properties.
e On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters set in the printer.
Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings.

Additional printer setup

f Click OK, and then close all the dialogs.
g Print a test page to verify printer installation.

Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:

• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option, and then install it again.

• Network setup page—If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network, then print a
network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids
network printing configuration.

Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page

Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page

2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.

Loading paper and specialty media

Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,
see “Avoiding jams” on page 238 and “Storing paper” on page 79.

Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit
Notes:

• The Paper Size setting is automatically set according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the
standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1) and the multipurpose feeder.

• The Paper Size setting for Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder must be set manually in the Paper Size menu.
• The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper.
• The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays.

Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal paper size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus.
Notes:

• The smallest supported Universal size is 76.2 x 76.2 mm (3 x 3 inches).
• The largest supported Universal size is 215.9 x 359.92 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches).
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select the unit of measure >

2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3 Select the width or height, and then touch

Loading trays
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.

1 Pull out the tray completely.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the printer display. Doing so may cause
a jam.

Loading paper and specialty media

2 Squeeze, and then slide the width guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.

EC
EX
R A4
LT L
LG
B5

2
A
4

LT
EX

R
EC

A
5

Loading paper and specialty media

3 Squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.

EC
EX
R A4
LT L
LG
B5

A5
A6

A
4

LT
R

EX
EC

A
5

Notes:

• For some paper sizes like letter, legal, and A4, squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab backward to
accommodate their length.

• When loading legal‑size paper, the length guide extends beyond the base leaving the paper exposed to dust.
To protect the paper from dust, you can purchase a dust cover separately. For more information, contact
customer support.

• If you are loading A6-size paper in the standard tray, squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab toward the
center of the tray to the A6‑size position.

• Make sure the width and length guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray.

Loading paper and specialty media

EC
EX
R A4
LT L
LG
B5
A5
A6
A
4

LT
R

EX
EC

A
5

4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.

5 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.

Loading paper and specialty media

• There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or
not, and whether two sided printing is needed.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher

AB
C

One‑sided printing

AB
C

AB C
Two‑sided (duplex) printing

Two‑sided (duplex) printing

• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the width guide. Overfilling
may cause paper jams.

EC
EX
R A4
LT L
LG
B5
A5
A6
A4

LT
EX

R
EC

A
5

Loading paper and specialty media

6 Insert the tray.

7 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and paper type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.

Loading the multipurpose feeder
Use the multipurpose feeder when printing on different paper sizes and types or specialty media, such as card stock,
transparencies, paper labels, and envelopes. You can also use it for single‑page print jobs on letterhead.

1 Open the multipurpose feeder.

Loading paper and specialty media

a Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.

b Pull the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.

Loading paper and specialty media

2 Squeeze the tab on the left width guide, and then move the guides for the paper you are loading.

3 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.
• Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.

• Hold transparencies by the edges. Flex the stack of transparencies back and forth to loosen them, and then fan
them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.

Loading paper and specialty media

• Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.

4 Load the paper or specialty media.
Notes:

• Do not force paper or specialty media into the multipurpose feeder.
• Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the paper
guides. Overfilling may cause paper jams.

• Load paper, transparencies, and card stock with the recommended printable side faceup and the top edge
entering the printer first. For more information on loading transparencies, see the packaging that the
transparencies came in.

Loading paper and specialty media

Note: When loading A6‑size paper, make sure the multipurpose feeder extender rests lightly against the
edge of the paper so that the last few sheets of paper remain in place.

• Load letterhead faceup with the top edge entering the printer first. For two‑sided (duplex) printing, load
letterhead facedown with the bottom edge entering the printer first.

Loading paper and specialty media

• Load envelopes with the flap on the left side facedown.

Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.

5 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper or specialty
media loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

Using the standard bin and paper stop
The standard bin holds up to 150 sheets of 20‑lb paper. It collects prints facedown. The standard bin includes a paper
stop that keeps paper from sliding out the front of the bin as it stacks.
To open the paper stop, pull it so that it flips forward.

Note: Close the paper stop when moving the printer to another location.

Loading paper and specialty media

Linking and unlinking trays
When the paper size and paper type for any trays are the same, the printer links those trays. When one linked tray
becomes empty, paper feeds from the next linked tray. We recommend giving all unique paper, such as letterhead and
different colored plain papers, a different custom type name so that the trays they are in do not automatically link.

Linking and unlinking trays
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
• To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
• To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4 Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information,
see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 60.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are
not properly configured.

Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
4 Click Submit.
5 Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.

Loading paper and specialty media

Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names

2 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
3 Touch

4 Touch Custom Types, and then verify that the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.

Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.

4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types

2 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.

3 Touch

Configuring a custom name
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Loading paper and specialty media

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom name you want to configure, then select a paper or specialty media type, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types

2 Select a custom name you want to configure, and then touch

Paper and specialty media guide

Paper and specialty media guide
Notes:

•
•
•
•

Make sure the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading it.
The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site
http://support.lexmark.com.

Using specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
•
•
•
•

Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Before loading letterhead, flex, fan, and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:

– “Loading trays” on page 60
– “Loading the multipurpose feeder” on page 65

Tips on using transparencies
• Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Feed transparencies from the standard tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures
up to 185°C (365°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
Note: If the transparency weight is set to Heavy and the transparency texture is set to Rough in the Paper menu,
then transparencies can be printed at a temperature up to 195°C (383°F).

• Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
• Before loading transparencies, flex, fan, and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.

Tips on using envelopes
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.

• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that
the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or
releasing hazardous emissions.

• For best performance, use envelopes made from 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All‑cotton envelopes
must not exceed 70 g/m2 (20 lb bond) weight.

• Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.

Paper and specialty media guide

• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
– Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
– Have bent corners
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.

Tips on using labels
Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Note: Use only paper label sheets. Vinyl, pharmacy, and two‑sided labels are not supported.
For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
When printing on labels:

• Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:
– The labels can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.

– Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25‑psi (172‑kPa) pressure without
delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.

• Do not use labels with slick backing material.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner cartridge
warranties.

• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die‑cuts of the
label.

• Make sure the adhesive backing does not reach to the edge of the sheet. Zone coating of the adhesive should be
at least 1 mm (0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the
warranty.

• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, then remove a 2‑mm (0.06‑inches) strip on the leading and driver
edge, and use a non‑oozing adhesive.

• Portrait orientation is recommended, especially when printing bar codes.

Paper and specialty media guide

Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before
buying large quantities.

• From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Card Stock.
• Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or
other paper handling problems.

• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F)
without releasing hazardous emissions.

• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting
introduces semi‑liquid and volatile components into the printer.

• Use grain short card stock when possible.

Paper guidelines
Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample of the
paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.

Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating
new paper stock.

Weight
The standard printer trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 90‑g/m2 (24‑lb) bond grain long paper. The
optional trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 120‑g/m2 (32‑lb) bond grain long paper. The multipurpose
feeder can automatically feed paper weights up to 163‑g/m2 (43‑lb) bond grain long paper. Paper lighter than
60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75‑g/m2 (20‑lb)
bond grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches), it is recommended to use 90 g/m2
(24 lb) or heavier paper.
Note: Two‑sided printing is supported only for 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) bond paper.

Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.

Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points;
smoothness between 150–250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.

Paper and specialty media guide

Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24–48
hours before printing. Extend the time to several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different
from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.

Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) bond paper, grain long paper is recommended.

Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.

Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:

• Chemically‑treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper

• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater or lesser than +/‑2.5 mm
(+/‑0.10 inch), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms:

•
•
•
•
•

Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
Rough‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
Multiple‑part forms or documents

Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:

• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.

• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.

Paper and specialty media guide

• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:

• Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) weight paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use papers printed with heat‑resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand
temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by
the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.
When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or
releasing hazardous emissions.

Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study demonstrating
that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However, no blanket statement
can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.
Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of test paper
from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has found no
reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property guidelines apply
to recycled paper.

• Low moisture content (4–5%)
• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)
Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much
rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very
well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.

• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)
• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper
that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for
reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper
supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause
paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing
conditions).

Paper and specialty media guide

Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:

• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most
label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity
between 40 and 60 percent.

•
•
•
•

Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
Store individual packages on a flat surface.
Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper
help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
Supported paper sizes
Paper size and dimension Standard
550‑sheet tray

Optional 250‑ or Multipurpose
550‑sheet tray
feeder

Business card

3 x 5 in.

4 x 6 in.

ADF

Scanner
glass

Duplex
mode

A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 in.)
A5

148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 in.)
A6

105 x 148 mm
(4.13 x 5.83 in.)
JIS B5

182 x 257 mm
(7.17 x 10.1 in.)
Letter
215.9 x 279.4 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
*

Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is at least 210 mm (8.27 in.) and the length is at least 279.4 mm
(11 in.). The smallest supported Universal size is supported only in the multipurpose feeder.

Paper and specialty media guide

Paper size and dimension Standard
550‑sheet tray

Optional 250‑ or Multipurpose
550‑sheet tray
feeder

ADF

Scanner
glass

Executive

Duplex
mode
X

184.2 x 266.7 mm
(7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Oficio (México)
215.9 x 340.4 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Folio

215.9 x 330.2 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement

139.7 x 215.9 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
Universal*
76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) to
215.9 x 359.92 mm
(8.5 x 14.17 in.)
7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch)

9 Envelope
98.4 x 226.1 mm
(3.875 x 8.9 in.)

10 Envelope

98.4 x 190.5 mm
(3.875 x 7.5 in.)

104.8 x 241.3 mm
(4.12 x 9.5 in.)
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm
(4.33 x 8.66 in.)
C5 Envelope
162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)
B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)
Other Envelope
85.7 x 165 mm to
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(3.375 x 6.50 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
*

Paper and specialty media guide

Supported paper types and weights
The standard tray supports 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) paper weights. The optional tray supports 60–120‑g/m2 (16–32‑lb)
paper weights. The multipurpose feeder supports 60–163‑g/m2 (16–43‑lb) paper weights.
Paper type

250‑ or
550‑sheet tray

Multipurpose feeder

Duplex mode

ADF

Scanner glass

Plain paper
Card stock

Transparencies

Recycled
X

Paper labels1
Bond
Envelope2

Rough envelope

Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored paper
Light paper
Heavy paper
Rough/Cotton

Custom Type [x]
1

One‑sided paper labels designed for laser printers are supported for occasional use. We recommend printing only up to
20 pages of paper labels per month. Vinyl, pharmacy, and two‑sided labels are not supported.

Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed on a table facedown.

Paper sizes, types, and weights supported by the optional finisher
Supported paper sizes
Paper size

Dimensions

Staple finisher

210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 in.)

148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in.)

105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 in.)

JIS B5

182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.)

Letter

216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in.)

Paper and specialty media guide

Paper size

Dimensions

Staple finisher

Legal

216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)

Executive

184 x 267 mm (7.3 x 10.5 in.)

Oficio (México)

216 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Folio

216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in.)

Statement

140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in.)

Universal

105 x 216 mm to 216 x 356 mm
(4.13 x 8.5 in. to 8.5 x 14 in.)

7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch)

98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in.)

9 Envelope

98 x 225 mm (3.9 x 8.9 in.)

10 Envelope

105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 in.)

DL Envelope

110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 in.)

C5 Envelope

162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.01 in.)

B5 Envelope

176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 in.)

Other Envelope

98 x 162 mm (3.9 x 6.4 in.) to 176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)

Supported paper types and weights
Paper type

Staple finisher

Plain paper
Card stock

Transparencies

Recycled
Paper labels
Bond
Envelope

Rough envelope

Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored paper
Light paper
Heavy paper
Rough/Cotton

Paper and specialty media guide

Paper type
Custom Type [x]

Staple finisher

Printing

Printing
Printing forms and a document
Printing forms
Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that
is regularly printed. Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting
up Forms and Favorites” on page 23.

1 From the printer home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings

2 Depending on your printer model, touch

, or Submit.

Printing a document
1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2 Send the print job:
For Windows users
a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust the settings, if necessary.
d Click OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings in the Print dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2 From the Print dialog and pop‑up menus, adjust the settings if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3 Click Print.

Adjusting toner darkness
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Printing

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3 Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness

2 Adjust the setting, and then touch Submit.

Printing from a mobile device
For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application, visit
http://lexmark.com/mobile.
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.

Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:

• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control
panel.

• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.

Printing

Notes:

• A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.

• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the printer
display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents
from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector, the
memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory
device. Loss of data can occur.

2 From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3 Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document.
4 Use

to specify the number of copies to be printed, and then touch Print.

Notes:

• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
• If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held Jobs on
the home screen to print files from the flash drive.

Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:

• High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not supported.
• USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology
File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.

Printing

Recommended flash drives

File type

• Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)
• SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)
• Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)

Documents:

• .pdf
• .xps
Images:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

.dcx
.gif
.jpeg or .jpg
.bmp
.pcx
.tiff or .tif
.png
.fls

Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Use

Max Invalid PIN

Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN
are deleted.

Confidential Job Expiration

Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control
panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 1–9.

Repeat Job Expiration

Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.

Verify Job Expiration

Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It allows you to
examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically deleted
from the printer memory when all copies are printed.

Reserve Job Expiration

Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.

Notes:

• Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.

• You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer
control panel.

• All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.

Printing

2 Touch Submit.

Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.

For Windows users
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Print and Hold.
4 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.

5 Click OK or Print.
6 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print

• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

For Macintosh users
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.

4 Click OK or Print.
5 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print

• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

Modifying confidential print settings
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Printing

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Configuration > Other Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3 Modify the settings:
• Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that user
are deleted.

• Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time, all of
the jobs for that user are deleted.

4 Save the modified settings.

Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts

2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.

Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory

Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press

on the keypad.

2 Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.

Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK

Printing

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Double‑click the printer icon.
3 Select the print job you want to cancel.
4 Click Delete.

For Macintosh users
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Open Print Queue
• System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Open Print Queue
2 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.

Copying

Copying
Scanner glass

AB
C

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).

Making copies
Making a quick copy
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are
the same.

3 From the printer control panel, press

Copying using the ADF
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 Adjust the paper guides.

Copying

3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It

Copying using the scanner glass
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the next
page.

3 Touch Finish the Job.

Copying photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo >

3 From the Content Source menu, select the appropriate setting that best matches the original photo.
4 Touch

> Copy It

Note: If you have more photos to copy, then place the next photo on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the
next page.

5 Touch Finish the Job.

Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >

Copying

3 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It
If there are no trays that contain transparencies, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder >

> select the size of the transparencies >

> Transparency >

4 Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.

Copying on letterhead
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the letterhead > Copy It

5 If there are no trays that support letterhead, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder > select the size of the letterhead > Letterhead

6 Load the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.

Customizing copy settings
Copying to a different size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select a new size for the copy >

> Copy It

Copying

Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the paper type you want to use >

5 Touch Copy It.

Copying different paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy
to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper
size (Example 2).

Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 Navigate to:
Copy to > Auto Size Match >

> Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes
corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.

Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Copying

4 Navigate to:
Copy to > Letter >

> Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on
the paper size selected.

Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred duplexing method
Note: For the preferred duplexing method, the first number represents sides of the original documents while
the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select “2 sided to 2 sided” if you have two-sided
original documents and you want two‑sided copies.

4 Touch

> Copy It.

Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Copy.

Copying

4 From the Scale area, touch

to decrease or increase the value by 1%.

Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original document to
fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.

5 Touch Copy It.

Adjusting copy quality
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying.
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.

5 Touch

6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying.
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
7 Touch

> Copy It.

Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).

Copying

Collated

Not collated

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

> Copy It

Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Set Collate to “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to “1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2,”
then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job. For more information, see “Collating copies” on
page 96.

4 Select one of the following:
• Between Copies
• Between Jobs
• Between Pages
• Off
5 Touch

> Copy It.

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single
sheet of paper.

Copying

Notes:

• Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
• Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

> Copy It

Note: If Paper Saver is set to Off, then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.

Creating a custom copy job
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the specified settings, and then it scans the next set with the
same or different settings.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:

• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF tray becomes empty.
• If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
For example:

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

> Copy It

Note: When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.

4 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan from automatic feeder or Scan from flatbed.
Note: Change the scan job settings, if necessary.

5 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.

Copying

Placing information on copies
Placing a header or footer on pages
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer > select where you want to place the header or footer > select the type
of header or footer you want

4 Enter the required information depending on the header or footer you selected, and then touch Done.
5 Touch

, and then press

Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom, and
Draft.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel.

Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
From the home screen, touch Cancel Job.
Canceling appears on the display. When the job is canceled, the Copy screen appears.

Copying

100

Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1 From the home screen, touch Cancel Job, or press

on the keypad.

2 Touch the job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.

Understanding the copy options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document.

• Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
• To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes.
• To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document, touch Auto Size Sense.

Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.

• Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
• If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting
to accommodate the difference.

• If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder,
and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.

• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching
paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a
tray or multipurpose feeder.

Scale
This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set automatic
scaling.

• When copying to a different paper size, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, set the “Copy from” and “Copy
to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.

• To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch

or
on the printer control panel. To make a continuous
decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.

Sides (Duplex)
This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.

Copying

101

Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.

Copies
This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.

Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:

•
•
•
•

Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.

Select from the following content sources:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
Brochure—The original document is from a brochure.
Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut number.

Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:

• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you scan the
document.

• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Fix Scan Skew—This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF tray.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.

E-mailing

102

E-mailing
Scanner glass

AB
C

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).

You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e‑mail
from the printer. You can type the e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.

Setting up the printer to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.

Configuring e‑mail settings
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.

E-mailing

103

3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.

Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Type a unique name for the e‑mail recipient, and then type the e‑mail address. If you are entering multiple addresses,
then separate each address with a comma.

5 Click Add.

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.

2 Touch Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
3 Touch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
4 Adjust the e‑mail settings.
Note: If you change the settings after the e‑mail shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.

5 Touch

6 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
7 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:

• The shortcut name appears in the E-mail Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
• You can use the shortcut when e‑mailing another document using the same settings.

E-mailing

104

E-mailing a document
You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the
e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut
application from the printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen applications"
section of the User’s Guide.

Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper size are
the same.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s)

4 Type the e‑mail address, or press # using the keypad, and then enter the shortcut number.
Notes:

• To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want
to add.

• You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.
5 Touch Done > Send It.

Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press #, then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch

Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number that
you want to add.

4 Touch Send It.

E-mailing

105

Sending an e‑mail using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

> type the name of the recipient > Search

4 Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number that
you want to add, or search the address book.

5 Touch Done.

Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 Touch Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
5 Touch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.

Changing the output file type
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

E-mailing

106

3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done > Send as

4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.
• PDF—Create a single file with multiple pages.
• Secure PDF—Create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.

• JPEG—Create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web
browsers and graphics programs.

• XPS—Create a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet
Explorer‑hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third‑party standalone viewer.

5 Touch

> Send It.

Note: If you selected Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.

Canceling an e-mail
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.

Understanding the e-mail options
Recipient(s)
This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.

Subject
This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.

Message
This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.

File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.

Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e‑mail. When Original Size is set to Mixed
Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).

E-mailing

107

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.

Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file
size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:

• PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages.
Note: PDF is the factory default setting.

• Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.

• JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
• XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.

Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:

•
•
•
•

Select from the following content sources:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

E-mailing

108

Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:

• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.

• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.

• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned,
the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:

• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

Faxing

109

Faxing
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.
Scanner glass

AB
C

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).

Setting up the printer to fax
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
Note: The following connection methods are applicable only in select countries or regions.
During the initial printer setup, clear the Fax funtion and any other function you plan to set up later, and then press
Continue.
Note: The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.

Faxing

110

Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom
of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the business, other entity,
or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other
entity, or individual). For more information, see “Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment” on
page 328.
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web
Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup
information.

Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start‑up screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities,
then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear.

1 When the Fax Name screen appears, do the following:
a Enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
b Enter the fax name, and then touch Submit.
2 When the Fax Number screen appears, enter the fax number, and then touch Submit.

Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.

Faxing

111

Choosing a fax connection
Scenario 1: Standard telephone line
Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the

port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
Tips for this setup:

• You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer Off).
• If you want to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings
that you want.

Faxing

112

Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine
Connected to the same telephone wall jack

PHONE

LINE

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the answering machine to the

port of the printer.

Faxing

113

Connected to different wall jacks

PHONE

LINE

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the

port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
Tips for this setup:

• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes automatically
(Auto Answer On).

• Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering machine picks
up calls after four rings, then set the printer to pick up after six rings. This way, the answering machine picks up
calls first and your voice calls are received. If the call is a fax, then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and
takes over the call.

• If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company, then make sure that you set the
correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive
faxes automatically.

Faxing

114

Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the

port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the telephone to the

port of the printer.

Tips for this setup:

• This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service. If you have distinctive ring service, then make
sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you
have set it to receive faxes automatically.

• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes manually
(Auto Answer Off).
When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the telephone
to receive the fax.

• You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), but you need to turn off the voice
mail service when you are expecting a fax. This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax.

Faxing

115

Scenario 2: Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)

A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone and fax
signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel. This way, you can use
the same line for analog voice calls (including faxes) and digital Internet access.
To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection, you need to install a DSL filter
for the analog devices (fax machine, telephone, answering machine) in your network. Interference causes noise and
static on the telephone, failed and poor quality faxes for the printer, and slow Internet connection on your computer.
To install a filter for the printer:

1 Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the

port of the printer. Connect the other

end to the phone port on the DSL filter.

3 To continue using a computer for Internet access, connect the computer to the DSL HPN port on the DSL filter.
4 To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the
connect the telephone to the port.

port of the printer, and then

Faxing

116

Scenario 3: VoIP telephone service

To connect:

1 Connect one end of a telephone cable to the

port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.
The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. You may need to pay extra to your VoIP provider if
you want to activate the second phone port.

3 Remove the protective plug from the

port of the printer, and then connect the telephone to the port.

Tips for this setup:

• To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the phone port, and
then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.

• If you need two phone ports for your devices but do not want to pay extra, then do not plug the printer into the
second phone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line 1 or Phone Port, and
then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug an
analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.

Faxing

117

Scenario 4: Digital telephone service through a cable provider
Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the

port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost
for activation of the second phone port.

3 Connect your analog telephone phone to the

port of the printer.

Notes:

• To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active, plug an analog telephone into the
telephone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.

• If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the
printer into the second telephone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.

• Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug
an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.

Faxing

118

Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the

port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Connect your analog telephone to the

port of the printer.

Scenario 5: Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs
Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the
printer. The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ-11. Your printer comes with the RJ-11 jack
and a telephone cable with the RJ-11 plug.

Faxing

119

If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection, then you need to use a
telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer, and you may need to
purchase it separately.

There may be an adapter plug installed in the
port of the printer. If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility
port of the printer.
that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme, then do not remove the adapter plug from the

Part name

Part number

Lexmark adapter plug

40X8519

Faxing

120

Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ‑11 wall jack

LINE

EXT

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the

port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3 If you want to connect another device (telephone or answering machine) to the same wall jack, and if the device
has a non‑RJ‑11 connector, then connect it directly to the telephone adapter.
Notes:

• The
the

port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter. Do not remove the plug from
port of the printer.

• In some countries or regions, the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug.

Faxing

121

Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany
The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering machines. The
F port is for telephones.

N F N

Connect the printer to any of the N ports.

N F N

PHONE

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the

LINE

port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.

Faxing

122

3 If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices as
shown.
Note: Do not remove the adapter plug from the
telephone system.

port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded

Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple telephone
numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for
distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to
connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

3 Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer.
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the printer to answer single, double, and
triple ring patterns.

a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Answer On

b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch

Setting the outgoing fax name and number
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Faxing

123

Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4 Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.

Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time
Zone Setup section.

4 Click Submit.

Sending a fax
You can use the printer to send a fax to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the e‑mail address,
use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the
printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen applications" section of the User’s
Guide.

Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Faxing

124

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut.
Note: To add recipients, touch Next number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut
number, or search the address book.

5 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax using the computer
The printer driver fax option lets you send a print job to the printer, which sends the job as a fax. The fax option works
as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel.

1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Navigate to:
Fax tab > Enable fax

4 Enter the recipient fax number or numbers in the “Fax number(s)” field.
Note: Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature

5 If necessary, enter a prefix in the “Dialing prefix” field.
6 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.
7 If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and then enter the
appropriate information.

8 Click OK.
Notes:

• The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on
installing these drivers, see the Software CD.

• The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it
can be used.

• If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you are prompted to verify the
recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is cleared, then the queued document is sent
automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.

Sending a fax using a shortcut number
Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or a fax machine. A shortcut number (1–999) can contain
a single recipient or multiple recipients.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Faxing

125

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax using the address book
The address book lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers. For more information on enabling the
address book feature, contact your system support person.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax >

> type the name of the recipient > Search

Note: You can search only for one name at a time.

4 Touch the name of the recipient, and then touch Fax It.

Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for
transmission are listed in the fax queue.

Faxing

126

4 Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch

The time is increased or decreased in 30‑minute increments.

5 Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.

Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.

3 Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
Notes:

• To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
• Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4 Assign a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

5 Click Add.

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
Note: To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.

2 Touch

3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Note: If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.

Faxing

127

Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to select the resolution you want.
Note: Select a resolution from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).

5 Touch Fax It.

Making a fax lighter or darker
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 Adjust the fax darkness, and then touch Fax It.

Viewing a fax log
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Reports.
3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.

Faxing

128

Blocking junk faxes
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:

• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.
• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers you want
to block.

Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears or while
Scan the Next Page and Finish the Job appear.

Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.

2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the
job you want to cancel.

3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.

Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or
at a scheduled day or time.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Faxing

129

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
• Off
• Always On
• Manual
• Scheduled
4 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5 Click Add.

Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4 From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax, E‑mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
5 In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.

6 Click Submit.

Understanding the fax options
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.

Faxing

130

Select from the following content types:

•
•
•
•

Select from the following content sources:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Resolution
This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Select one of the following:

•
•
•
•

Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.

Delayed Send
This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.

Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:

• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page (duplex).
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.

• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.

• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Faxing

131

Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:

• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image,
Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you fax the document.

Scanning

132

Scanning
You can use the printer to send a file to an FTP address. You can type the e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or
use the address book. You can also use the Multi-send or MyShortcut application from the printer home screen. For
more information, see the "Activating the home screen applications" section of the User’s Guide.

Using Scan to Network
Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person. After
the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup process for the application
involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server. For more
information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 26.

Scanning to an FTP address
Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to
an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for
creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer control panel.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Navigate to:
Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup

3 Enter the appropriate information.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.

4 Enter a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

5 Click Add.

Scanning

133

Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address >

> type a name for the shortcut > Done

2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Notes:

• If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
• If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Done > Send It

Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press # on the keypad, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4 Touch

> Send It.

Scanning an FTP using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Scanning

134

> type the name of the recipient > Search

4 Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To search for additional recipients, touch New Search, and then type the name of the next recipient.

5 Touch

> Send It.

Scanning to a computer or flash drive
You can use the printer to send a scanned file. You can also use Scan to Network, Multisend, and MyShortcut applications
from the printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen applications" section of the
User’s Guide.
Scanner glass

AB
C

ADF

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly
connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer over
the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.

Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Scan Profile > Create Scan Profile.
3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.

Scanning

135

4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image.
5 Type a scan name, and then a user name.
Note: The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.

6 Click Submit.
Note: Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number. You can use this shortcut number when you are
ready to scan your documents.

7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

b If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
c Do either of the following:
• Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
• From the home screen, navigate to:
Held Jobs > Profiles > select your shortcut on the list
Note: The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified.

8 View the file from the computer.
Note: The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.

Setting up Scan to Computer
Notes:

• This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.
• Make sure that your computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Depending on your operating system, click Add devices and printers, Add a device, or Add a printer.

Scanning

136

3 Select your printer from the list.
Note: To identify your printer, print a network setup page, and then look for “Fully Qualified Domain Name” in
the TCP/IP section.

4 Click Next > Close.
5 Depending on your device, do either of the following:.
• Press and hold the printer you want to configure.
• Right‑click the printer you want to configure.
6 From the menu that appears, select Scan Properties or Properties, and then change the settings as necessary.
7 From the printer control panel, touch Scan to Computer and then select from the following options:
• Scan—Scan and save the document directly to a selected location on the computer.
• Scan for Print—Scan and automatically print the document.
• Scan for E‑mail—Attach a scanned document to an e‑mail.
• Scan for Fax—Attach a scanned document to be sent through fax.
8 Touch Send It.
Remote scan in progress appears on the printer display. The scanned image opens automatically on the
computer screen.

Scanning to a flash drive
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
Note: The USB Drive home screen appears.

4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
Note: The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity.

5 Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It.

Scanning

137

Using the ScanBack Utility
You can use the Lexmark ScanBackTM Utility instead of the Embedded Web Server to create scan‑to‑computer profiles.
The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from the Lexmark Web site at http:\\support.lexmark.com.

1 Set up your scan‑to‑computer profile:
a Launch the ScanBack Utility.
b Select the printer.
If no printers are listed, then contact your system support person, or click Setup to manually search for an IP
address or host name.

c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind
of output you want to create.

d Assign a file name of your scan profile, and then specify a location on your computer.
e Click Finish.
A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.
Note: You can select Create Shortcut to create a shortcut of the scan profile settings to your desktop.

2 Scan your original documents:
a Load all pages into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
b From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Held jobs > Profiles and Solutions > select your scan profile
Note: Your output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.

Understanding the scan options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

File Name
This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.

Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a number.

Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes,
you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).

Scanning

138

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.

Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:

• PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages.
• Secure PDF—Use to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu, then TIFF
saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.

• JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
• XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.

Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:

•
•
•
•

Select from the following content sources:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Scanning

139

Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:

• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.

• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:

• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you
scan the document.

• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then shows an
error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.

Understanding the printer menus

140

Understanding the printer menus
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

“Menus list” on page 140
“Paper menu” on page 141
“Reports Menu” on page 151
“Network/Ports menu” on page 152
“Security menu” on page 161
“Settings menu” on page 166
“Help menu” on page 210

Menus list
Paper Menu

Reports

Network/Ports

Security

Default Source

Menu Settings Page

Active NIC

Edit Security Settings

Paper Size/Type
Configure MP

Device Statistics
Stapler Test

Standard

Network2

Standard USB

Miscellaneous Security
Settings

Parallel [x]
Serial [x]

Confidential Print Menu

Paper Texture

Network Setup
Network [x] Setup Page

Paper Weight

Shortcut List

SMTP Setup

Security Audit Log

Paper Loading

Fax Job Log

Custom Types

Fax Call Log

Substitute Size

Custom

Names1

Page1

Copy Shortcuts

Custom Scan Sizes

E‑mail Shortcuts

Universal Setup

Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Print Demo
Asset Report

Disk Wiping
Set Date and Time

Understanding the printer menus

141

Settings

Help

Manage Shortcuts

Option Card Menu3

General Settings

Print All Guides

Fax Shortcuts

Copy Settings

Copy Guide

E-mail Shortcuts

Fax Settings

E‑mail Guide

FTP Shortcuts

A list of installed DLEs
(Download Emulators)
appears.

E‑mail Settings

Fax Guide

Copy Shortcuts

FTP Settings

FTP Guide

Profile Shortcuts

Flash Drive Menu

Print Defects Guide

Print Settings

Information Guide
Supplies Guide

Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Network Setup Page or Network [x] Setup Page.

Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].

This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.

Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use

Default Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope

Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:

• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP Feeder to
appear as a menu setting.

• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the paper size and
paper type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When
one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.

Understanding the printer menus

142

Paper Size/Type menu
Use

Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal

Specify the size of the paper loaded in each tray.

Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]

Specify the type of the paper loaded in each tray.

Notes:

• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

• If the same size and type of paper are loaded in two trays and the tray
settings for paper size and type match, then the trays are automatically
linked. The multipurpose feeder may also be linked. When one tray is
empty, the job prints using paper from the linked tray.

• A6 is supported only in Tray 1 and in the multipurpose feeder.

Notes:

• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.

• If available, a user‑defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].
• Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.

Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Understanding the printer menus

143

Use

MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope

Specify the size of the paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]

Specify the type of the paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

Notes:

• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP Feeder
Size to appear as a menu item.

• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size. The
paper size value must be set.

Notes:

• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” in order for MP
Feeder Type to appear as a menu item.

Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Understanding the printer menus

144

Use

Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal

Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.

Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]

Specify the type of the paper being manually loaded.

Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope

Specify the size of the envelope being manually loaded.

Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]

Specify the type of the envelope being manually loaded.

Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

Notes:

• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” in order for
Manual Paper Type to appear as a menu item.

Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.

Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.

Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Understanding the printer menus

145

Configure MP menu
Use

Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First

Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:

• Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.

• Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual‑feed print jobs.
• First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.

Substitute Size menu
Use

Substitute Size
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed

Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.
Notes:

• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.

• Off indicates no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper
message appearing.

Paper Texture menu
Use

Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.

Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.

Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.

Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if card stock is supported.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

146

Use

Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.

Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.

Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.

Rough Envelope Texture
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded.

Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.

Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.

Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.

Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.

Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.

Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.

Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Note: Rough is the factory default setting.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if the custom type is supported.

Understanding the printer menus

147

Paper Weight menu
Use

Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.

Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.

Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.

Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.

Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.

Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.

Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.

Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.

Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.

Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

148

Use

Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.

Light Weight
Light

Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is light.

Heavy Weight
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded is heavy.

Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded.

Custom [x] Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only when the custom type is supported.

Paper Loading menu
Use

Card Stock Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Card Stock as the paper type.

Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type.

Labels Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Labels as the paper type.

Bond Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type.

Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Print Preferences in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.

Understanding the printer menus

149

Use

Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type.

Colored Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type.

Light Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Light as the paper type.

Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type.

Rough/Cotton Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Rough or Cotton as the paper type.

Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Custom [x] as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading appears only when the custom type is
supported.

Notes:

Custom Types menu
Use

Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Envelope

Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default
custom type name or a user‑defined custom name created from the
Embedded Web Server or from MarkVisionTM Professional.

Notes:

• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder to print from that source.

Understanding the printer menus

150

Use

Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Envelope

Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus.

Notes:

• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder to print from that source.

Custom Names menu
Use

Custom Name [x]

Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type [x] in
the printer menus.

Custom Scan Sizes menu
Use

Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Width
Height
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
2 scans per side
Off
On

Specify a custom scan size name and page orientation.
Notes:

• The custom scan size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer
menus.

• ADF Media Type is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 3, 4,
5, and 6.

• 8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 210 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Width.

• 14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 297 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Height.

• Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
• Off is the factory default setting for “2 scans per side.”

Universal Setup menu
Use

Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters

Identify the units of measure.
Notes:

• Inches is the US factory default setting.
• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

151

Use

Portrait Width
3–8.5 inches
76–216 mm

Set the portrait width.
Notes:

• If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.

• 8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the
width in 0.01‑inch increments.

• 216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the width in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm

Set the portrait height.
Notes:

• If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.

• 14 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the
height in 0.01‑inch increments.

• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the height in 1‑mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge

Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction.
Notes:

• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the
maximum width supported in the tray.

Reports Menu
Reports menu
Use

Menu Settings Page

Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed
memory, total page count, alarm settings, timeouts, printer control panel
language, TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection,
and other information.

Device Statistics

Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and number
of printed pages.

Network Setup Page

Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected
to print servers.

Network [x] Setup Page

Print a report containing information about the network settings of the printer,
such as the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers, and when there is more than one network option installed.

Understanding the printer menus

152

Use

Shortcut List

Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.

Fax Job Log

Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Note: This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.

Fax Call Log

Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and
blocked calls.
Note: This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.

Copy Shortcuts

Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.

E‑mail Shortcuts

Print a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts.

Fax Shortcuts

Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.

FTP Shortcuts

Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.

Profiles List

Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.

Print Fonts

Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer.

Print Directory

Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or printer
hard disk.
Notes:

• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
• Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is working and
installed correctly.
Asset Report

Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number
and model name. The report contains text and UPC bar codes that can be scanned
into an asset database.

Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Use

Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when an optional network card is installed.

Standard Network or Network [x] menu
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.

Understanding the printer menus

153

Use

PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off

Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off

Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it,
regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
NPA Mode
Off
Auto

Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Network Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]

Set the size of the network input buffer.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The value can be changed in 1KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.

• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel, and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.

Understanding the printer menus

154

Use

Standard Network Setup or
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk

Display and set the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
network.

Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use

Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.

Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use

View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected

View the connection status of the network card.

View Card Speed

View the speed of an active network card.

Network Address
UAA
LAA

View the network addresses.

Job Timeout
0–255 seconds

Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
Notes:

• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
• If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.

Understanding the printer menus

155

TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Use

Set Hostname

Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.

IP Address

View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.

Netmask

View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.

Gateway

View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.

Enable DHCP
On
Off

Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.

Enable RARP
On
Off

Specify the RARP address assignment setting.

Enable BOOTP
On
Off

Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.

Enable AutoIP
Yes
No

Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.

Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No

Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer
Protocol.

Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No

Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer
can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.

WINS Server Address

View or change the current WINS server address.

Enable DDNS
Yes
No

View or change the current DDNS setting.

Enable mDNS
Yes
No

View or change the current mDNS setting.

DNS Server Address

View or change the current DNS server address.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

156

Use

Backup DNS Server Address

View or change the backup DNS server addresses.

Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS
Yes
No

View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use

Enable IPv6
On
Off

Enable IPv6 in the printer.

Auto Configuration
On
Off

Specify whether or not the wireless network adapter accepts the
automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.

View Hostname

Set the host name.

View Address

Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.

View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.

Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to an Ethernet network and printers with a wireless network
adapter attached.
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Wireless
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless

Understanding the printer menus

157

Use

Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method

Establish a wireless network connection and enable network security.
Notes:

• Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.

• Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when
a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the
access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Enable
Disable

Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with
WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.

Network Mode

Specify the network mode.

BSS Type
Infrastructure
Ad hoc

Notes:

Note: Disable is the factory default setting.

• Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer
access a network using an access point.

• Ad hoc configures a wireless connection directly between the
printer and a computer.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n

Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.

Choose Network

Select an available network for the printer to use.

View Signal Quality

View the quality of the wireless connection.

View Security Mode

View the encryption method for the wireless network.

Note: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.

AppleTalk menu
Note: This menu appears only in printer models that are connected to an Ethernet network or when an optional
wireless network adapter is installed.
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Use

Activate
Yes
No

Enable or disable AppleTalk support.

View Name

Show the assigned AppleTalk name.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.

Understanding the printer menus

158

Use

View Address

Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.

Set Zone
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
[list of zones available on the network] Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.

Standard USB menu
Use

PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off

Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off

Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto

Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.

• The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.

Understanding the printer menus

159

Use

USB Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]

Set the size of the USB input buffer.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard
disk are printed before normal processing resumes.

• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.

• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.

• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto

Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Set the network address information for an external print server.

ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Set the netmask information for an external print server.

ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Set the gateway information for an external print server.

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.

Understanding the printer menus

160

SMTP Setup menu
Use

Primary SMTP Gateway

Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.

Primary SMTP Gateway Port

Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.

Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30

Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.

Reply Address

Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer.

Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required

Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server.
Notes:

• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.

SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5

Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e‑mail
privileges.

Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials

Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
server.

User‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID and Password
Use Session E‑mail address and Password
Prompt user
Device Userid
Device password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain

Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail and
User‑Initiated E‑mail.

• “Device Userid” and “Device password” are used to log in to the
SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.

Understanding the printer menus

161

Security menu
Edit Security Setups menu
Note: This menu appears only in select touch‑screen printer models.
Use

Edit Backup Password
Use Backup Password

Create a backup password.

• Off
• On
Password

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting for “Use Backup Password.”
• This menu appears only if a backup password exists.

Edit Building Blocks
Internal Accounts
NTLM
Simple Kerberos Setup
Kerberos Setup
Active Directory
LDAP
LDAP+GSSAPI
Password
PIN

Edit settings for Internal Accounts, NTLM, Simple Kerberos Setup, Kerberos Setup,
Active Directory, LDAP, Password, and PIN.

Edit Security Templates
[list of available templates]

Add or edit a security template.

Edit Access Controls
Administrative Menus
Function Access
Management
Solutions
Cancel jobs at the Device

Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points.

Understanding the printer menus

162

Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use

Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
panel before all users are locked out.
Notes:

• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts is the factory default setting.

• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 60
minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.

• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. 5 minutes is the
factory default setting. 1 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.

• “Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the
Home screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1
to 900 seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.

• “Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle
before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1 to 120
seconds. 10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper
Access controls=”No Security”
No Effect
Reset factory security defaults

Change the value of the security settings.
Notes:

• Access controls=”No Security” retains all the security information that the user
has defined. “No Security" is the factory default setting.

• “No Effect” means the reset has no effect on the device’s security
configuration.

• “Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user
has defined, and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the
Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Embedded
Web Server.
LDAP Certificate Verification
Demand
Try
Allow
Never

Allow the user to request a server certificate.
Notes:

• “Demand” means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is
provided or if no certificate is provided, then the session is terminated
immediately. “Demand” is the factory default setting.

• “Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then
the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then the session
is terminated immediately.

• “Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then it will
be ignored, and then the session proceeds normally.

• “Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16

Limit the digit length of the PIN.
Note: 4 is the is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

163

Confidential Print menu
Use

Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10

Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Notes:

• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
• When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.

Confidential Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs.
Off
Notes:
1 hour
• If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs
4 hours
reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those
24 hours
print jobs does not change to the new default value.
1 week
• If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory are
deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week

Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.

Verify Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week

Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.

Reserve Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week

Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Disk Wiping menu
Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All
permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use

Wiping Mode
Auto

Specify the mode for disk wiping.

Understanding the printer menus

164

Use

Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass

Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit the file
system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Notes:

• “Single pass” is the factory default setting.
• Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to
turn off the printer for an extended amount of time.

• Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass
method.

Security Audit Log menu
Use

Export Log

Let an authorized user export the audit log.
Notes:

• To export the audit log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be
attached to the printer.

• The audit log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and saved
on a computer.
Delete Log
Yes
No

Specify whether or not audit logs are deleted.

Configure Log
Enable Audit
Yes
No
Enable Remote Syslog
No
Yes
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Severity of events to log
0–7

Specify how and whether or not audit logs are created.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and
remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.

• Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the
factory default setting.

• Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote
syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.

• If the security audit log is activated, then the severity value of each event is
recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.

Set Date/Time menu
Use

Current Date and Time

View the current date and time settings for the printer.

Manually Set Date and Time

Enter the date and time.
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.

Time Zone

Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

165

Use

Automatically Observe DST
On
Off

Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times
associated with the printer Time Zone setting.

Custom Time Zone Setup
DST Start Week
DST Start Day
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Offset

Enable the user to set up the time zone.

Enable NTP
On
Off

Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network.

NTP Server

View the NTP server address.

Enable Authentication
On
Off

Change the authentication setting to On or Off.

Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time
associated with the Time Zone setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

166

Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use

Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese

Set the language of the text appearing on the printer display.

Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper

Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.

Note: Not all languages are available for all printers, and you may
need to install special hardware for those languages to appear.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to its
factory default settings.

• The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.

• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and
specialty media.

• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media
needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but
print quality is not.
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled

Specify whether or not the ADF sounds a beep when paper is
loaded.

ADF Multi‑feed Sensor
On
Off

Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once.

Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

167

Use

Quiet Mode
Off
On

Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. This supports the
performance specifications for your printer.

• On configures the printer to produce as little noise as
possible. This is best suited for printing text and line art.

• For optimal printing of color‑rich documents, set Quiet Mode
to Off.

• Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable Quiet
Mode and provide better print quality and full‑speed
printing.
Run Initial setup
Yes
No

Set the printer to run the setup wizard.
Notes:

• Yes is the factory default setting.
• After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the
“Country select” screen, the default becomes No.

Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]

Specify a language and custom key information for the printer
keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and
symbols from the keyboard.

Understanding the printer menus

168

Use

Paper Sizes
US
Metric

Specify the default system of measurement for paper sizes.
Notes:

• US is the factory default setting.
• The initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.

• Changing this also changes the default setting for each input
source in the Paper Size/Type menu.
Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]

Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers
separated by a semicolon.
Note: “9751:12000” is the factory default setting.

Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text [x]

Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the
home screen.
For the Left side and Right side menus, select from the following
options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:

• IP Address is the factory default setting for “Left side.”
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for “Right side.”

Understanding the printer menus

169

Use

Displayed Information (continued)
Black Toner

Customize the displayed information for Black Toner.
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:

• “Do not display” is the factory default setting for “When to
display.”

• Default is the factory default setting for “Message to
display.”
Displayed Information (continued)
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors

Customize the displayed information for Paper Jam, Load Paper,
and Service Errors menus.
Select from the following options:
Display
Yes
No
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:

• No is the factory default setting for Display.
• Default is the factory default setting for “Message to
display.”

Understanding the printer menus

170

Use

Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Solutions
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Forms and Favorites

Change the icons that appear on the home screen.

Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD

Format the printer date.

Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock

Format the printer time.

Screen Brightness
20–100

Specify the brightness of the printer control panel screen.

One Page Copy
Off
On

Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.

Output Lighting
Normal/Standby Mode
Off
Dim
Bright

Set the amount of light from the standard output bin.

For each icon, select from the following options:
Display
Do not display
Notes:

• Display is the factory default setting for the Copy, Fax,
E‑mail, FTP, Search Held Jobs, Held Jobs, USB Drive, and
Forms and Favorites menus.

• “Do not display” is the factory default setting for the Change
Language, Copy Shortcuts, Fax Shortcuts, E‑mail Shortcuts,
FTP Shortcuts, Profiles and Solutions, Bookmarks, and “Jobs
by user” menus.

Notes:

• MM‑DD‑YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting.
• DD-MM-YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Note: “12 hour A.M./P.M.” is the factory default setting.

Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Dim is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is set to Energy
or Energy/Paper.

• Bright is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is Off or set
to Paper.

Error Lighting
On
Off

Determine if indicator lights blink when the printer encounters
errors.
Note: On is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

171

Use

Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
Off

Set the audio volume for the buttons.

Volume
1–10

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
• 5 is the factory default setting for Volume.

Tactile Touchscreen Feedback
On
Off

Provide touch‑screen sensation feedback.

Show Bookmarks
Yes
No

Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.

Allow Background Removal
On
Off

Specify whether image background removal is allowed in copy, fax,
e‑mail, FTP, or scan‑to‑USB jobs.

Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off

Scan multiple jobs to one file.

Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level

Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs
in the ADF.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting. When Yes is selected,
bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.

Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the
image will be removed.
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then the
Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.

Notes:

• Job level is the factory default setting.
• If Job level is selected, then the entire job must be rescanned
if any pages jam.

• If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed page
forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300

Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
refreshes.
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.

Contact Name

Specify a contact name for the printer.
Note: The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web
Server.

Location

Specify the location of the printer.
Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.

Understanding the printer menus

172

Use

Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Staple Alarm

Set an alarm to sound when the printer requires user intervention.
When activated, Alarm Control lets you set the number of times
that the alarm sounds, while Cartridge Alarm lets you stop printing
when a cartridge‑low condition occurs.
For each alarm type, select from the following options:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:

• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. This
sounds three quick beeps.

• Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm and
Staple Alarm. This means no alarm will sound.

• Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
1–240

Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer
enters a lower power state.

Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1–180

Set the amount of time in minutes the printer waits after a job is
printed before it goes into a reduced power state.

Note: 15 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 30 is the factory default setting.
• Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.

• Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical
circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the
room.

• Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under
most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print
with minimum warm‑up time.
Timeouts
Timeout
Disabled
1–3 hours
6 hours
1–3 days
1–2 weeks
1 month

Set the printer to operate at a low power state.

Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Hibernate
Do Not Hibernate

Set the printer to Hibernate Timeout even when there is an active
Ethernet or phone connection.

Notes:

• Disabled is the factory default setting in all countries except
in European Union countries and Switzerland.

• “3 days” is the factory default setting in European Union
countries and Switzerland.

Note: Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

173

Use

Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300

Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
returning the printer display to Ready state.

Timeouts
Prolong Screen Timeout
On
Off

Show a message that lets you reset the screen timeout timer
instead of returning to the home screen.

Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255

Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an
end‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the print
job.

Note: 30 is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 90 is the factory default setting.
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any
new print jobs are waiting.

• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.
This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535

Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional
data before canceling a print job.
Notes:

• 40 is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL
emulation print jobs.

Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255

Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
continues to print other jobs in the print queue.
Notes:

• 30 is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working
printer hard disk is installed.
Error Recovery
Auto Reboot
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never

Automatically reboot the printer.

Error Recovery
Max Auto Reboots
1–20

Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can
perform.

Note: “Reboot when idle” is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

174

Use

Print Recovery

Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline
situations when not resolved within the specified time period.

Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
Off
Auto

Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
pages is needed for other printer tasks.

• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery
Jam Assist
On
Off

Set the printer to automatically check for jammed paper.

Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
On

Let the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed
otherwise.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. This prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.

• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the
entire page prints.
Press Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate

Determine how the printer responds to a short press of the Sleep
button when the printer is idle.

Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate

Determine how the printer responds to a long press of the Sleep
button when the printer is idle.

Note: Sleep is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
• Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.

• If the printer is in Sleep Mode, then the touch screen
appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color.

• Press and hold the Sleep button for 3 seconds or longer to
enter Hibernate mode.

• Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on
the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode.

Understanding the printer menus

175

Use

Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now

Return the printer settings to the factory default settings.
Notes:

• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. This keeps the
user‑defined settings.

• Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in
flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.

Copy Settings menu
Use

Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo

Specify the content of the original document.

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specify how the original document was produced.

Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided

Specify whether an original document is two‑sided (duplex) or one‑sided, and then
specify whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on one side and the copy
will also have print on one side.

• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on one side, while the
copy will have print on both sides.

• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on both sides, while the
copy will have print on just one side.

• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on both sides, and the
copy will also have print on both sides.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑up Portrait
4‑up Portrait
2‑up Landscape
4‑up Landscape

Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

176

Use

Print Page Borders
On
Off

Specify whether or not a border is printed.

Collate
1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2
1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3

Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies.

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card

Specify the paper size of the original document.

Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Auto Size Match
Manual Feeder

Specify the paper source for copy jobs.

Transparency Separators
On
Off

Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.

Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages

Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.

Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]

Specify the separator sheet source.

Darkness
1–9

Specify the level of darkness for the copy job.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
• A4 is the international factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

177

Use

Number of Copies
1–999

Specify the number of copies for the copy job.

Header/Footer
[Location]
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text

Specify the header or footer information and its location on the page.
For the location, select from the following options:

Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Off

Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.

Custom Overlay

Specify the custom overlay text.

Note: 1 is the factory default setting.

•
•
•
•
•
•

Top left
Top middle
Top right
Bottom left
Bottom middle
Bottom right

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting for the location.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for “Print on.”
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copies
On
Off

Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.

Custom Job scanning
On
Off

Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single copy job.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.

Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.

Auto Center
Off
On

Automatically align the content at the center of the page.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

178

Use

Contrast
0–5
Best for content

Specify the contrast used for the copy job.

Mirror Image
Off
On

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image
Off
On

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.

Fix Scan Skew
Auto
Off
On

Correct slight skew in the scanned image.

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specify if the original document is scanned edge‑to‑edge prior to faxing.

Sharpness
1–5

Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.

Sample Copy
Off
On

Create a sample copy of the original document.

Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.

General Fax Settings
Use

Fax Name

Specify the name of the fax in the printer.

Fax Number

Specify the number assigned to the fax.

Fax ID
Fax Name
Fax Number

Specify how the fax is identified.

Understanding the printer menus

179

Use

Enable Manual Fax
On
Off

Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.

• Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly send
All send

Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.
Notes:

• “Equal” is the factory default setting. This splits the memory for sending and
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.

•
•
•
•

“Mostly send” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
“All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
“All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
“Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.

Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow

Specify whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs.

Caller ID
Off
Primary
Alternate

Specify the type of caller ID being used.

Fax number masking
Off
From left
From right

Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.

Note: Allow is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask”
setting.

Digits to Mask
0–58

Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

180

Use

Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
Off
Include from Field
On
Off
From
Include Message Field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer [x]
On
Off
Footer [x]

Configure the fax cover page.
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.

Fax Send Settings
Use

Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi

Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but
increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

181

Use

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.

Specify the paper size of the original document.

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge

Specify how text and graphics are oriented on a page.

Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• “Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).

• “Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo

Specify the content of the original document.

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specify how the original document was produced.

Darkness
1–9

Lighten or darken the output.

Dial Prefix

Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.

Note: Text is the factory default setting.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

182

Use

Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]

Establish a dialing prefix rule.

Automatic Redial
0–9

Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.

Redial frequency
1–200

Specify the number of minutes between redials.

Behind a PABX
Yes
No

Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.

Enable ECM
Yes
No

Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.

Enable Fax Scans
On
Off

Fax files that are scanned at the printer.

Driver to fax
Yes
No

Allow the printer driver to send fax jobs.

Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.

Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse

Specify the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.

Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600

Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.

Custom Job scanning
On
Off

Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.

Scan Preview
On
Off

Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.

Contrast
0–5
Best for content

Specify the contrast in the scanned image.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: No is the factory default setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Tone is the factory default setting.

Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

183

Use

Mirror Image
Off
On

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image
Off
On

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge prior to faxing.

Sharpness
1–5

Adjust the sharpness of a fax.

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the
default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Fax Receive Settings
Use

Enable Fax Receive
On
Off

Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.

Fax Job Waiting
None
Toner
Toner and Supplies

Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable
resources.

Rings to Answer
1–25

Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.

Auto Reduction
On
Off

Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated
fax source.

Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
Multi‑Purpose Feeder

Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.

Sides (Duplex)
Off
On

Enable two‑sided (duplex) printing for incoming fax jobs.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

184

Use

Separator Sheets
Off
Before Job
After Job

Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.

Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specify where the printer will pick the separator sheet.

Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]

Specify a bin for received faxes.

Fax Footer
On
Off

Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.

Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600

Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.

Fax Forwarding
Print
Print and Forward
Forward

Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.

Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF

Specify the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded.

Forward to Shortcut

Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS,
or eSF).

Block No Name Fax
Off
On

Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID
specified.

Banned Fax List

Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.

Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule

Enable fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.

Note: Print is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Fax is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is available only from the Embedded Web Server.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

185

Use

Staple
Off
1 staple

Specify whether prints are stapled.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Fax Log Settings
Use

Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error

Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.

Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error

Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error.

Auto Print Logs
On
Off

Enable automatic printing of fax logs.

Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.

Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number

Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or fax
name returned.

Enable Job Log
On
Off

Enable access to the Fax Job log.

Enable Call Log
On
Off

Enable access to the Fax Call log.

Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]

Specify the bin where fax logs are printed.

Note: Print log is the factory default setting.

Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

186

Speaker Settings
Use

Speaker Mode
Always Off
On until Connected
Always On

Specify the mode of the speaker.
Notes:

• On until Connected is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the fax
connection is made.

• Always On turns the speaker on.
• Always Off turns the speaker off.
Speaker Volume
High
Low

Control the volume setting.

Ringer Volume
Off
On

Control the fax speaker ringer volume.

Note: High is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Answer On
Use
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only

To
Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.

E‑mail Settings menu
Use

E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
File Name

Specify e‑mail server information.

E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On

Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.

Notes:

• You can enter up to 255 characters in the Subject field.
• You can enter up to 512 characters in the Message field.
• You can enter up to 53 characters in the File Name field.
Note: “Never appears” is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

187

Use

E‑mail Server Setup
Max E‑mail size
0–65535 KB

Specify the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes.

E‑mail Server Setup
Size Error Message

Send a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit.

E‑mail Server Setup
Limit destinations

Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limit e‑mail
destinations only to that domain name.

Note: E-mails above the specified size are not sent.

Note: You can enter up to 1024 characters.

Note: You can specify only one domain.
E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
File Name
Web Link

Define the e‑mail server path name, for example: /directory/path.

Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)

Specify the format of the scanned file.

PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A–1a

Set the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e‑mailing.

Content Type
Graphics
Text
Text/Photo
Photo

Specify the content of the original document.

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specify how the original document was produced.

Notes:

• The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.
• You can enter up to 128 characters for Server, Login, Password, Path, and Web
Link.

• You can enter up to 53 characters for File Name.

Note: “PDF (.pdf)” is the factory default setting.

Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

188

Use

Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi

Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.

Darkness
1–9

Lighten or darken the output.

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specify the page orientation of the scanned image.

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.

Specify the paper size of the document being scanned.

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge

Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.

Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
• A4 is the international factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• “Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).

• “Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).

Understanding the printer menus

189

Use

JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90

Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Notes:

•
•
•
•

“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu item applies to all scan functions.

Text Default
5–90

Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.

Text/Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.

E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link

Specify how the images are sent.

Use Multi‑Page Tiff
On
Off

Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.

Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error

Specify whether or not the transmission log prints.

Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.

E‑mail Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit

Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.

Custom Job scanning
On
Off

Note: “Print log “is the factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: “8 bit” is the factory default setting.
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.

Understanding the printer menus

190

Use

Scan Preview
On
Off

Specify whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.

Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail
Destination screen.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.

Contrast
0–5
Best for content

Specify the contrast of the output.

Mirror Image
Off
On

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image
Off
On

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Fix Scan Skew
Auto
Off
On

Correct slight skew in the scanned image.

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.

Sharpness
1–5

Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default, while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only in select printer models.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Use cc:/bcc:
Off
On

Enable the use of the cc and bcc fields.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

191

FTP Settings menu
Use

Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)

Specify the format of the file for FTP sending.

PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A–1a

Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending.

Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo

Specify the content of the original document.

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specify how the original document was produced.

Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi

Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).

Darkness
1–9

Lighten or darken the output.

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specify the page orientation of the scanned image.

Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.

Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

192

Use

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.

Specify the paper size of the original document.

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge

Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.

Notes:

• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
• A4 is the international factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• “Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape ).

• “Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape ).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90

Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Notes:

•
•
•
•

“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu item applies to all scan functions.

Text Default
5–90

Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.

Text/Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

193

Use

Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off

Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error

Specify whether the transmission log prints.

Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.

FTP bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit

Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.

File Name

Type a base file name.

Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.

Note: You can enter up to 53 characters.
Custom Job Scanning
On
Off

Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.

Scan Preview
On
Off

Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.

Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.

Contrast
0–5
Best for content

Specify the contrast of the output.

Mirror Image
Off
On

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image
Off
On

Create a negative image of the original document.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

194

Use

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Fix Scan Skew
Auto
Off
On

Correct slight skew in the scanned image.

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.

Sharpness
1–5

Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned image.

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is supported only in select printer models.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Scan Settings menu items and their descriptions
Use

Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)

Specify the format of the file to be sent through FTP.

PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A‑1a

Set the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP.

Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo

Specify the content of the original document.

Note: “PDF (.pdf)” is the factory default setting.

Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

195

Use

Content Source
Black and White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specify how the original document was produced.

Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi

Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).

Darkness
1–9

Lighten or darken the output.

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specify the orientation of the scanned image.

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.

Specify the paper size of the original document.

Note: “Black and White Laser” is the factory default setting.

Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

196

Use

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long Edge
Short Edge

Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).

• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90

Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Notes:

•
•
•
•

Text Default
5–90

Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.

Text/Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality.

Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.

Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off

Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
File Name

Type a base file name.
Note: A maximum of 53 characters is allowed.

Custom Job Scanning
On
Off

Copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job.

Scan Preview
On
Off

Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.

Contrast
0–5
Best for content

Specify the contrast of the scanned image.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

197

Use

Mirror Image
Off
On

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image
Off
On

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.

Sharpness
1–5

Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Print Settings
Print Settings menu items and their descriptions
Copies
1–999

Specify a default number of copies for each print job.

Paper Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope

Set a default paper source for all print jobs.

Collate
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)

Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.

Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided

Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.

Staple
Off
On

Specify whether prints are stapled.

Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: “1 sided” is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a staple finisher is installed.

Understanding the printer menus

Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge

198

Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to page orientation.
Notes:

• Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top
edge for landscape).

• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and
left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up

Specify that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper.

Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical

Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.

Notes:

• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or
landscape orientation.

Paper Saver Orientation Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Auto
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.
Landscape
Portrait
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid

Print a border on each page image.

Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages

Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to
“(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a blank page is inserted between
each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.

• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is
useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document .
Separator Sheet Source Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Tray [x]
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Manual Feeder
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print

Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

199

Print Settings
Setup menu
Use

Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation

Set the printer language.
Notes:

• PCL Emulation is the factory default setting.
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.

Job Waiting
On
Off

Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they
require unavailable printer options or custom settings.
Print jobs removed from the print queue are stored in a separate
print queue, so other jobs print normally. When the missing
information or options are obtained, the stored jobs print.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu setting appears only when a formatted, working
printer hard disk is installed. This requirement ensures that
stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power.
Print Area
Normal
Whole Page

Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.

• Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the
printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary.
This affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter.
This has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or
PostScript interpreter.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk

Set the storage location for downloads.
Notes:

• RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in the
RAM is temporary.

• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk
places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in
flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the
printer is turned off.

• This menu setting appears only when a formatted, working
flash drive or printer hard disk is installed.

Understanding the printer menus

200

Use

Resource Save
On
Off

Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a
job that requires more memory than is available.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to
retain the downloads only until memory is needed.
Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.

• On retains the downloads during language changes and
printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then
Memory Full [38] appears, and downloads are not
deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First

Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
when Print All is selected.
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always
appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.

Finishing menu
Use

Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided

Specify whether two‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:

• “1 sided” is the factory default setting.
• You can set two‑sided printing from the printer software.
For Windows users:
Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
For Macintosh users:
Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop‑up
menus.

Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge

Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed in relation to page orientation.
Notes:

• Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long
edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).

• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999

Specify the default number of copies for each print job.

Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print

Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.

Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

201

Use

Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)

Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.

Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages

Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.

Notes:

• “(1,1,1) (2,2,2)” is the factory default setting.
• On stacks the print job in sequence.
Notes:

• None is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a
blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all
page 1's and after all page 2's.

• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in
a document.
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Notes:

• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Manual Feeder to
appear as a menu setting.

Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up

Print multiple‑page images on one side of a paper.

Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical

Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images when using Paper Saver.

Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait

Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.

Paper Saver Border
None
Solid

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.

Notes:

• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.
Print a border when using Paper Saver.
Note: None is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

202

Use

Staple Job
Off
On

Specify whether printed output is stapled.

Run Stapler Test

Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.
Note: This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.

Quality menu
Use

Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q

Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch.

Pixel Boost
Off
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both directions
Isolated

Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance images horizontally
or vertically, or to enhance fonts.

Toner Darkness
1–10

Lighten or darken the printed output.

Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 8 is the factory default setting.
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off

Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• You can set this option from the printer software. For Windows users, click File >
Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For Macintosh
users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and
pop‑up menus.

• To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP
address in the Web browser address field.
Gray Correction
Auto
Off

Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

203

Use

Brightness
‑6 to 6

Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve toner
by lightening the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Contrast
0–5

Adjust the contrast of printed objects.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed. Make sure the printer
hard disk is not read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Use

Job Accounting Log
Off
On

Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.

Job Accounting Utilities

Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.

Accounting Log Frequency
Weekly
Monthly

Determine and set how often a log file is created.

Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log

Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.

Disk Near Full Level
Off
1–99

Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near
Full Action.

Disk Near Full Action
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current

Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting.
• The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.

Understanding the printer menus

204

Use

Disk Full Action
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current

Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum
limit (100MB).

URL to Post Logs

Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.

E‑mail Address to Send Logs

Specify the e‑mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.

Log File Prefix

Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.

Utilities menu
Use

Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All

Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:

• Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not
affected.

• Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash
Yes
No

Format the flash memory.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
being formatted.
Notes:

• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in
the printer.

• The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
• This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.

Understanding the printer menus

205

Use

Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete

Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
and parked jobs.
Notes:

• Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to
return to the originating screen after the deletion.

• Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for
touch‑screen printer models. When selected in non‑touch‑screen printer
models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after
the deletion.
Activate Hex Trace

Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:

• When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.

• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator
Off
On

Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

XPS menu
Use

Print Error Pages
Off
On

Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

PDF menu
Use

Scale to Fit
Yes
No

Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.

Annotations
Do Not Print
Print

Print annotations in a PDF.

Note: No is the factory default setting.

Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

PostScript menu
Use

Print PS Error
On
Off

Print a page containing the PostScript error.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

206

Use

Lock PS Startup Mode
On
Off

Disable the SysStart file.

Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk

Establish the font search order.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Resident is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory option
card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.

• Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.

• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.

PCL Emul menu
Use

Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All

Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu.
Notes:

• “Resident” is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory
default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.

• “Flash” and “Disk” settings show all fonts resident in that option.
• The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write‑,
write‑, or password‑protected.

• “Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• “All” shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10

Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored.

Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850

Specify the symbol set for each font name.

Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font
name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for Download.

Notes:

• 10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.

• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.

Understanding the printer menus

207

Use

PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00

Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:

• 12 is the factory default setting.
• Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 inch.

• Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100

PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:

•
•
•
•

10 is the factory default setting.
Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but it
cannot be changed.

Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.
Notes:

• Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.

• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255

Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:

• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the Paper Size
and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page.

PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm

Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:

• “198 mm” is the factory default setting.
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of eighty
10‑pitch characters.

PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
Off

Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
a line feed (LF) control command.

PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
Off

Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

208

Use

Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
Off
None
0–199

Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays and feeders.

Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T1 Default = 4
T1 Default = 5
T1 Default = 20
T1 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3

Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.

Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No

Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.

Notes:

• “Off” is the factory default setting.
• “None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option appears only
when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.

• “0–199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.

Understanding the printer menus

209

HTML menu
Use
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers

To
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO

Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
specify a font.

Use

Font Size
1–255 pt

Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:

• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%

Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:

• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

210

Use

Margin Size
8–255 mm

Set the page margin for HTML documents.
Notes:

• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print

Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.

Image menu
Use

Auto Fit
On
Off

Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.

Invert
On
Off

Invert bitonal monochrome images.

Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width

Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape

Set the image orientation.

Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
for some images.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Notes:

• Best Fit is the factory default setting.
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.

Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Help menu
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They
contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Menu item

Description

Print All Guides

Prints all the guides

Copy Guide

Provides information about making copies and changing settings

Understanding the printer menus

211

Menu item

Description

E‑mail Guide

Provides information about sending e‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or
the address book, and about changing settings

Fax Guide

Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers,
or the address book, and about changing settings

FTP Guide

Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an
FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings

Print Defects Guide

Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints

Information Guide

Provides help in locating additional information

Supplies Guide

Provides part numbers for ordering supplies

Saving money and the environment

212

Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:

• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.

Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see "Using Eco-Mode."

Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled
paper and other office papers” on page 78.

Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports duplex printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the
paper by selecting 2‑sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar.

Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N‑Up) section of the Print dialog screen.

Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:

• Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the
document will look like before you print it.

• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.

Avoid paper jams
Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 238.

Saving money and the environment

213

Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting
Use

Off

Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. Off supports the performance
specifications of the printer.

Energy

Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.

• Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the
first page is printed.

• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper

• Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) feature.
• Turn off print log features.

3 Click Submit.

Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting

Saving money and the environment

214

Use

Reduce printer noise.
Notes:

• Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed.
• Printer engine motors do not start until a document
is ready to print. There will be a short delay before
the first page is printed.
Off

Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.

3 Click Submit.

Adjusting Sleep mode
To save energy, decrease the number of minutes the printer waits before it enters Sleep mode.
Available settings range from 1–180 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3 In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode

2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.
3 Touch

Saving money and the environment

215

Using Hibernate Mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and
all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.
3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop‑down menu, select Hibernate.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings

2 Touch Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button.
3 Touch Hibernate >

Setting Hibernate Timeout
Hibernate Timeout lets you set the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it goes into a
reduced power state.

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3 From the Hibernate Timeout menu, select the number of hours, days, weeks, or months you want for the printer
to wait before it goes into a reduced power state.

4 Click Submit.

Saving money and the environment

216

Using the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Hibernate Timeout

2 Select the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it enters Hibernate mode.
3 Touch

Using Schedule Power Modes
Schedule Power Modes lets you schedule when the printer goes into a reduced power state or into Ready state.
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Schedule Power Modes.
3 From the Action menu, select the power mode.
4 From the Time menu, select the time.
5 From the Day(s) menu, select the day or days.
6 Click Add.

Adjusting the brightness of the display
To save energy, or if you are have trouble reading your display, adjust the brightness of the display.
Available settings range from 20–100. The factory default setting is 100.

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.

Saving money and the environment

217

Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Screen Brightness

2 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
3 Touch

Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,
see:

• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:

1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.

Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the
box.

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return
the cartridges are also recycled.

Saving money and the environment

218

To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:

1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Securing the printer

219

Securing the printer
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Types of memory

Description

Volatile memory

Your printer uses standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to
temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy
jobs.

Non-volatile memory

Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to
store the operating system, device settings, network
information, scanner and bookmark settings, and embedded
solutions.

Hard disk memory

Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality. This lets
the device retain buffered user data from complex scan, print,
copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.

Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:

•
•
•
•
•
•

The printer is being decommissioned.
The printer hard disk is being replaced.
The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
The printer is being sold to another organization.

Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.

• Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to
physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.

Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered
data, simply turn off the printer.

Securing the printer

220

Erasing non‑volatile memory
• Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information
and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.

• Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.

3 Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer will restart several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords from the printer
memory.

4 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Erasing printer hard disk memory
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by scan, print, copy,
and fax jobs, by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.

Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.

3 Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
• Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
• Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.

4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:

• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
• Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable
for other user tasks.

5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.

Securing the printer

221

The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable the hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.

3 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:

• Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.

4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. Once the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or
Fax.

3 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.

4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:

• Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.

Securing the printer

222

• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer
will return to the Enable/Disable screen.

5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the
Lexmark security Web page.
You can also see the Embedded Web Server Administrator’s Guide for additional information:

1 Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then click SELECT YOUR PRODUCT.
2 From the “Search by Product Category” section, navigate to Software and Solutions > Other Applications.
3 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the Embedded Web Server Administrator’s Guide.

Maintaining the printer

223

Maintaining the printer
Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and supplies,
may cause damage to your printer.

Cleaning the printer parts
Cleaning the printer
Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer
warranty.

1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.

2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior
of the printer.

5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.

Maintaining the printer

224

Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.

1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner cover.

3 Clean all the areas shown, and then let them dry.

1
4

1 White underside of the scanner cover
2 Scanner glass
3 ADF glass
4 White underside of the ADF cover

4 Close the scanner cover.

Maintaining the printer

225

Checking the status of parts and supplies
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.

Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Device Status > More Details.

Ordering supplies
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies
dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact the
place where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.

Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies
or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use of third-party
supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts is not covered
by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver
unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may
damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.

Ordering a toner cartridge
Notes:

• The estimated cartridge yield is based on approximately 5% coverage per page.
• Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield.
Lexmark Return Program toner cartridge
Part name

Part number

Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge

24B6035

Maintaining the printer

226

Ordering an imaging unit
Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to exhaustion of
toner from toner cartridge.
For more information on replacing the imaging unit, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Lexmark Return Program imaging unit
Part name

Part number

Imaging unit

24B6040

Ordering staple cartridges
Part name

Part number

Staple cartridges

35S8500

Ordering a maintenance kit
Notes:

• Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
• The separator roller, fuser, pick rollers, transfer roller, and redrive assembly are all included in the maintenance
kit and can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary.

• Contact your service representative to replace the maintenance kit.
Recommended maintenance kits and part numbers
Maintenance kit

Part number

100‑V maintenance kit*

40X9147

110‑V maintenance kit

40X9137

220‑V maintenance kit

40X9138

This is available only in Japan.

Ordering an ADF separator roller
Order an ADF separator roller when the ADF fails to pick paper or picks more than one sheet of paper at a time.
For information on replacing the ADF separator roller, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.

Recommended part numbers
Part name

Part number

Separator roller

40X9108

Maintaining the printer

227

Estimated number of remaining pages
The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy may
vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings, and
other printer settings.
The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is
different from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing
supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, the estimated cartridge yield is
based on approximately 5% coverage per page.

Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Direct sunlight
Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
High humidity above 80%
Salty air
Corrosive gases
Heavy dust

Replacing supplies
Replacing the toner cartridge
1 Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.

Maintaining the printer

228

2 Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle.

3 Unpack the toner cartridge, and then remove all packing materials.
4 Shake the new cartridge to redistribute the toner.

5 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails
inside the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

6 Close the front door.

Maintaining the printer

229

Replacing the imaging unit
1 Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.

2 Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle.

3 Lift the green handle, and then pull the imaging unit out of the printer.

Maintaining the printer

230

4 Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it.

5 Remove all packing materials from the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of
future print jobs.

6 Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the arrows
on the side rails inside the printer.

Maintaining the printer

231

7 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails
inside the printer.

8 Close the front door.

Replacing the staple cartridge
1 Open the stapler door.

Maintaining the printer

232

2 Pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher.

3 Hold both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers, pull, and then lift the empty staple case from the cartridge.

3
2

4 Remove the spare staple case from its holder.

5 Insert the spare staple case into the staple cartridge.

1
2

Maintaining the printer

233

6 Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place.

7 Replace the spare staple case for future use.
8 Close the stapler door.

Moving the printer
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:

• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.

Maintaining the printer

234

• If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the
right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.

Moving the printer to another location
The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:

• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware
options.

• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.

Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.

Managing the printer

235

Managing the printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server Administrator's
Guide at http://support.lexmark.com.

Checking the virtual display
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.

Setting up e‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed
or added, or when there is a paper jam.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings menu, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e‑mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.

Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, network, and supplies.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Managing the printer

236

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.

Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web
Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Notes:

• Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.
• All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable alerts can
be set for the end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions.

• The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some
supply conditions.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3 From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification

Description

Off

The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.

E‑mail Only

The printer generates an e‑mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of the
supply appears on the menus page and status page.

Warning

The printer displays the warning message and generates an e‑mail about the status of the
supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.

Continuable Stop1

The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user needs
to press a button to continue printing.

Non Continuable Stop1,2

The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be
replaced to continue printing.

The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.

The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.

4 Click Submit.

Managing the printer

237

Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 59.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All
Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 220.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not
affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now >

Clearing jams

238

Clearing jams
Jam error messages appear on the printer display and include the area of the printer where the jam occurred. When
there is more than one jam, the number of jammed pages is displayed.

Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper

•
•
•
•

Incorrect loading of paper

Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.

Clearing jams

239

• Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly
against the paper or envelopes.

• Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.

Use recommended paper
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.

•
•
•
•

Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.

Understanding jam messages and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer
display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.
Notes:

• When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer automatically flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints to the
standard bin after a jammed page has been cleared. Check your printed output stack for discarded pages.

• When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, the Auto setting does not
guarantee that the page will print.

Clearing jams

240

1
9

3
4
8

5
7

Jam access area

Printer control panel message

What to do

Automatic
document feeder
(ADF)

[x]‑page jam, open ADF to clear
jam. [28y.xx]

Remove all paper from the ADF tray, and then remove the
jammed paper.

Standard bin

[x]‑page jam, clear standard
bin. [20y.xx]

Remove the jammed paper.

Front door

[x]‑page jam, open front
door. [20y.xx]

Open the front door, then remove the toner cartridge and
imaging unit, and then the jammed paper.

Multipurpose
feeder

[x]‑page jam, clear manual
feeder. [25y.xx]

Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and then
remove the jammed paper.

Tray 1

[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to
clear duplex. [23y.xx]

Pull out tray 1 completely, then push the front duplex flap
down, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note: You may need to open the rear door to clear
some 23y.xx paper jams.

Tray [x]

[x]‑page jam, open tray
[x]. [24y.xx]

Pull the indicated tray out, and then remove the jammed
paper.

Rear door

[x]‑page jam, open rear
door. [20y.xx]

Open the rear door, and then remove the jammed paper.

Finisher rear door

[x]-page jam, remove all pages
from the finisher’s accumulator.
Leave paper in bin [45y.xx]

• Open the finisher rear door, and then remove the
jammed paper.

• Open the trap door, and then remove the jammed
paper.

Finisher output bin

[x]-page jam, remove all pages
from the output bin. Leave paper
in bin [45y.xx]

• Move the left tamper arm to the left and the right
tamper arm to the right, and then remove the jammed
paper from the finisher bin.

• Open the finisher rear door and the trap door, and
then remove any jammed pages.

Clearing jams

241

[x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
Note: The message is cleared when the pages are removed from the ADF tray.

2 Open the ADF cover.

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4 Close the ADF cover.
5 Straighten the edges of the original documents, then load the documents into the ADF, and then adjust the paper
guide.

6 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]‑page jam, clear standard bin. [20y.xx]
1 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

2 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

Clearing jams

242

[x]‑page jam, open rear door. [20y.xx]
1 Open the front door to loosen the jammed paper in the rear door.

2 Gently pull down the rear door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams

243

4 Close the front and rear door.
5 From the printer control panel, select Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]‑page jam, open front door. [20y.xx]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

1 Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.

Clearing jams

244

2 Pull out the toner cartridge using the handle.

3 Lift the green handle, and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny blue photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing
so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

4 Place the imaging unit aside on a flat, smooth surface.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Clearing jams

245

5 Lift the green flap in front of the printer.

6 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

7 Insert the imaging unit by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the unit with the arrows on the side rails inside
the printer, and then insert the imaging unit into the printer.

Clearing jams

246

8 Insert the toner cartridge by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer,
and then insert the cartridge into the printer.

9 Close the front door.
10 From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx]
1 Pull out the tray completely.

Clearing jams

2 Locate the lever, and then pull it down to release the jam.

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4 Insert the tray.
5 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder. [25y.xx]
1 From the multipurpose feeder, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

247

Clearing jams

248

2 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.

3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder.

Note: Make sure the paper guide lightly rests against the edge of the paper.

4 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

Clearing jams

[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24y.xx]
1 Pull out the tray completely.
Note: The message on the printer display indicates the tray where the jammed paper is located.

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Insert the tray.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

249

Clearing jams

[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the output bin. Leave
paper in bin. [45y.xx]
Paper jam in the finisher bin
1 Empty the standard bin.

2 Move the tamper arms to the sides.

3 Remove all jammed pages from inside the access areas.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

250

Clearing jams

4 If necessary, touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Paper jam in the finisher rear door
1 Open the finisher rear door.

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

251

Clearing jams

3 Open the finisher trap door, remove any paper fragments inside the trap door.
Note: After removing any jammed paper in the finisher bin or in the finisher rear door, open the trap door to
remove any paper fragments.

4 Close the trap door.

252

Clearing jams

253

5 Close the finisher rear door.

6 If necessary, touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Staple jam in the finisher
1 Open the staple access door.

2 Pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher.

Clearing jams

3 Lift the staple guard, and then remove any jammed or loose staples.

4 Press down the staple guard until it clicks into place.

5 Insert stapler cartridge back into the finisher until it clicks into place.

254

Clearing jams

255

6 Close the staple access door.

7 If necessary, touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the finisher’s accumulator.
Leave paper in bin. [45y.xx]
Paper jam in the finisher bin
1 Empty the standard bin.

Clearing jams

2 Move the tamper arms to the sides.

3 Remove all jammed pages from inside the access areas.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4 If necessary, touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Paper jam in the finisher rear door
1 Open the finisher rear door.

256

Clearing jams

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Open the finisher trap door, and then remove any paper fragments from inside the trap door.
Note: After removing any jammed paper in the finisher rear door, open the trap door to remove any paper
fragments.

4 Close the trap door.

257

Clearing jams

5 Close the finisher rear door.

6 If necessary, touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

258

Troubleshooting

259

Troubleshooting
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

“Understanding the printer messages” on page 259
“Solving printer problems” on page 273
“Solving print problems” on page 280
“Solving copy problems” on page 305
“Solving fax problems” on page 309
“Solving scanner problems” on page 315
“Solving home screen applications problems” on page 320
“Embedded Web Server does not open” on page 320
“Contacting customer support” on page 321

Understanding the printer messages
Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch [41.xy]
Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y
indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:

List of printer and toner cartridge regions
Region number

Region

Global

United States, Canada

European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland

Asia Pacific, Australia, New Zealand

Latin America

Africa, Middle East, rest of Europe

Invalid region

Notes:

• The x and y values are the .xy of the error code shown on the printer control panel.
• The x and y values must match for printing to continue.

Cartridge low [88.xy]
You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to
clear the message and continue printing.

Troubleshooting

260

Cartridge nearly low [88.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]
You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of
the User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.

• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
• Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.

• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
• Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.

• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
• Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.

• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
• Cancel the print job.

Troubleshooting

261

Check tray [x] connection
Try one or more of the following:

• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
If the error occurs a second time, then:

1
2
3
4
5
6

Turn off the printer.
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Remove the indicated tray.
Reattach the tray.
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Turn the printer back on.

If the error occurs again, then:

1
2
3
4

Turn off the printer.
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Remove the tray.
Contact customer support.

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and resume the job.

Close front door
Close the front door of the printer.

Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.

• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last successful scan
job.

• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying,
faxing, or e-mailing.

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.

Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
• Cancel current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.

Troubleshooting

262

Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer:

•
•
•
•

The printer firmware has been updated.
The tray for the print job has been removed.
The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer
model.

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Defective flash detected [51]
Try one or more of the following:

• Replace the defective flash memory card.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.

Disk full [62]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
• Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.

Disk must be formatted for use in this device
From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.

Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.

Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.

Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.

Troubleshooting

263

Fax memory full
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on. If the message appears again, then contact your system support
person.

Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try either of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system
support person.

Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:

Imaging unit low [84.xy]
You may need to order a replacement imaging unit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear
the message and continue printing.

Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]
You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the
User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Troubleshooting

264

Incompatible tray [x] [59]
Try one or more of the following:

• Remove the indicated tray.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the
indicated tray.

Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the printer control panel.

• Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings.
• Check if the paper size is correctly set. For example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make sure the paper
is large enough for the data being printed.

• Check the length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Insufficient memory to collate job [37]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the
rest of the print job.

• Cancel the current print job.

Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in the printer memory.
• Install additional printer memory.

Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.

Troubleshooting

265

Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and continue printing.

Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it prints from the default paper
source.

• Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the indicated tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.

• Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper, then it feeds from that tray or
feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, then it prints from the default
paper source.

• Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control
panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that tray
or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from
the default paper source.

• Cancel the current job.

Troubleshooting

266

Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.

• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.

• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Maintenance kit low [80.xy]
You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and
continue printing.

Troubleshooting

267

Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]
For more information, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If
necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy]
You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and
continue printing.

Memory full [38]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to clear the message.
• Install additional printer memory.

Memory full, cannot print faxes
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes attempt to print after
the printer is restarted.

Memory full, cannot send faxes
1 From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job.
2 Try one or more of the following:
• Reduce the fax resolution, and then resend the fax job.
• Reduce the number of pages in the fax, and then resend the fax job.

Network [x] software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.

No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
Connect the printer to an analog phone line.

Troubleshooting

268

Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see User’s Guide [33.xy]
Note: The supply type can be a toner cartridge or the imaging unit.
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies
or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components.
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if
third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark
printer or associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by
the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.
To accept any and all of these risks, and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your printer, press
and hold and # on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message and continue printing.
If you do not wish to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer, and then install
a genuine Lexmark supply or part.
Note: For the list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com.

Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
• Install a flash memory card with larger capacity.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.

Paper changes needed
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt for each page to continue printing.
• Touch Use current supplies to continue printing using the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the current print job.

Parallel port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the parallel port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Parallel [x] > Parallel Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.

Troubleshooting

269

Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, visit http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.

Remove defective disk [61]
Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.

Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.

Replace defective imaging unit [31.xy]
Replace the defective imaging unit to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came
with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]
Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement toner cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide.

Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Replace the imaging unit. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]
Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative, and then report the message.
The printer is scheduled for maintenance.

Replace all originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.

• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.

Troubleshooting

270

Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:

• Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, install the toner cartridge.
For information on installing the cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.

• If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the cartridge is defective. Replace the toner
cartridge.

Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:

• Check if the imaging unit is missing. If missing, install the imaging unit.
For information on installing the imaging unit, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.

• If the imaging unit is installed, then remove the unresponsive imaging unit, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the imaging unit is defective. Replace the
imaging unit.

Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s
Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy]
Remove the imaging unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s
Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.

Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk.
• From the printer control panel, touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs.

Scanner automatic feeder cover open
Close the ADF cover.

Troubleshooting

271

Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]
Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.

Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02]
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
• Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.

Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.

Serial port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port.

• Make sure Serial Buffer is not set to Disabled.
• From the printer control panel, set Serial Buffer to Auto in the Serial [x] menu.

SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Some held jobs were not restored
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to delete the indicated job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.

Standard network software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.

Troubleshooting

Standard USB port disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the USB port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > USB Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the USB port.

Supply needed to complete job
Do either of the following:

• Install the missing supply to complete the job.
• Cancel the current job.

Too many flash options installed [58]
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

Too many trays attached [58]
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

Unformatted flash detected [53]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
• Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be replaced.

Unsupported disk
Remove the unsupported printer hard disk, and then insert a supported one.

272

Troubleshooting

273

Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

USB port [x] disabled [56]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Notes:

• The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.

Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Solving printer problems
• “Basic printer problems” on page 273
• “Option problems” on page 276
• “Paper feed problems” on page 279

Basic printer problems
The printer is not responding
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Turn on the printer.

Make sure the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Step 2
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?

Press the Sleep button Go to step 3.
to wake the printer
from Sleep mode or
Hibernate mode.

Troubleshooting

274

Action

Yes

Step 3

Go to step 4.

Plug one end of the
power cord into the
printer and the other to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.

Unplug the other
electrical equipment,
and then turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment.

Go to step 5.

Go to step 6.

Make sure to match the
following:

Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the
other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 4
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.
Does other electrical equipment work?

Step 5
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted
in the correct ports.

• The USB symbol on
the cable with the
USB symbol on the
printer

Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?

• The appropriate
Ethernet cable with
the Ethernet port
Step 6
Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker.

Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.

Go to step 7.

Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Step 7

Connect the printer
Go to step 8.
power
cord
directly
to
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
a properly grounded
power supplies, or extension cords.
electrical outlet.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Step 8

Go to step 9.

Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print server,
option, or other
network device.

Go to step 10.

Turn off the printer,
remove all packing
materials, then
reinstall the hardware
options, and then turn
on the printer.

Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer
and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
print server, option, or other network device?
Step 9
Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing
material.
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material
removed?

Troubleshooting

275

Action

Yes

Step 10

Go to step 11.

Use correct printer
driver settings.

Go to step 12.

Install the correct
printer driver.

Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver.
Are the port settings correct?
Step 11
Check the installed printer driver.
Is the correct printer driver installed?
Step 12
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Is the printer working?

Printer display is blank
Action

Yes

Step 1

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.
Does Ready appear on the printer display?
Step 2
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?

The problem is solved. Turn off the printer,
and then contact
customer support.

Troubleshooting

276

Option problems
Cannot detect internal option
Action

Yes

Step 1

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
printer.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
Step 2

Go to step 3.

Connect the internal
option to the controller
board.

Go to step 4.

Reinstall the internal
option.

Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board.
a Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet.
b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector
in the controller board.
c Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded
electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?
Step 3
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal option is
listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?
Step 4
a Check if the internal option is selected.
It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer
driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 48.
b Resend the print job.
Does the internal option operate correctly?

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Troubleshooting

277

Tray problems
Action

Yes

Step 1
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

• Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.

• If you are printing on custom‑size paper, then make sure that the
paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.

• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
b Check if the tray closes properly.
Is the tray working?
Step 2
a Turn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Is the tray working?
Step 3
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in the
Installed Features list.

Go to step 4.

Reinstall the tray. For
more information, see
the setup
documentation that
came with the tray.

Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?
Step 4
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.
Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it
available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available
options in the printer driver” on page 48.
Is the tray available in the printer driver?

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Troubleshooting

278

Cannot detect memory card
Action

Yes

Make sure the memory card is installed.
a Install the memory card. For more information, see “Installing a
memory card” on page 31.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Note: Check if the memory card is securely connected to the printer
controller board.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the card is listed in the
Installed Options list.
Is the card listed in the Installed Options list?

Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Check if you have a
supported ISP.

Make sure the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed.
a Install the ISP. For more information, see “Installing an Internal
Solutions Port” on page 35.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the ISP is listed in the
Installed Features list.

Note: An ISP from
another printer may
not work on this
printer.

Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list?
Step 2
Check the cable and the ISP connection.
a Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to
the ISP.
b Check if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected into the
receptacle of the controller board.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Note: The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on the
controller board are color‑coded.
Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly?

USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Check if you have a
supported USB or
parallel interface card.

Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed.
a Install the USB or parallel interface card. For more information, see
“Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 35.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the USB or parallel
interface card is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features list?

Note: A USB or parallel
interface card from
another printer may
not work on this
printer.

Troubleshooting

279

Action

Yes

Step 2

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection.
Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to
the USB or parallel interface card.

Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly?

Paper feed problems
Paper frequently jams
Action

Yes

Step 1
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:

Go to step 2.

The problem is solved.

Go to step 3.

The problem is solved.

• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.

• Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the
paper.

• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type.
b Insert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint
automatically.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Step 2
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Step 3
Contact customer
a Review the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see “Avoiding support.
jams” on page 238.
b Follow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting

280

Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
Action

Yes

Check the entire paper path for jammed paper.
a Remove any jammed paper.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Action

Yes

Turn on Jam Recovery.
a From the home screen, navigate to:

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

b From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Does the paper jam message remain?

Jammed pages are not reprinted

> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
b From the Jam Recovery menu, touch the arrows to scroll to On or
Auto.
c Touch Submit.
Do pages reprint after a jam?

Solving print problems
Printing problems
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
Action

Yes

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 1
a Check if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts.
For more information, see the documentation that came with Adobe
Acrobat.
b Generate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.
Do the files print?
Step 2
a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.

b Click File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.
Do the files print?

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Troubleshooting

281

Error message about reading the flash drive appears
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Insert the flash drive
into the front USB port.

Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port.
Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB
port.
Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?
Step 2

Wait until the printer is Go to step 3.
Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green. ready, then view the
held jobs list, and then
Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.
print the documents.
Is the indicator light blinking green?
Step 3
a Check for an error message on the display.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

Go to step 5.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Yes

b Clear the message.
Does the error message still appear?
Step 4
Check if the flash drive is supported.
For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives, see
“Supported flash drives and file types” on page 86.
Does the error message still appear?
Step 5
Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person.
Does the error message still appear?

Print jobs do not print
Action

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 1
a From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog and
check if you have selected the correct printer.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must select
the printer for each document that you want to print.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?

Troubleshooting

Action

282

Yes

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 2
a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears
on the printer display.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
Step 3

The problem is solved. Go to step 4.

If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the message.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.
Do the jobs print?
Step 4
a Check if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if the
cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer.

The problem is solved. Go to step 5.

Note: For more information, see the setup documentation that
came with the printer.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
Step 5
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
a Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
Step 6
a Remove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more
information, see “Installing the printer software” on page 48.
Note: The printer software is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Troubleshooting

283

Confidential and other held jobs do not print
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Select one of the Print
and Hold options, and
then resend the print
job. For more
information, see
“Printing confidential
and other held jobs” on
page 88.

Open the held jobs folder on the printer display, and then verify that your
print job is listed.
Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder?

Step 2

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.

• Delete the print job, and then send it again.
• For PDF files, generate a new PDF, and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading
multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one.
For Windows users
a Open the Print Properties folder.

b From the Print and Hold dialog, select the “Keep duplicate documents”
check box.
c Enter a PIN number.
For Macintosh users
Save each print job, name each job differently, and then send the
individual jobs to the printer.
Does the job print?
Step 3
Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held jobs.
Does the job print?

The problem is solved. Add additional printer
memory.

Troubleshooting

284

Print job takes longer than expected
Action

Yes

Step 1

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Change the environmental settings of the printer.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings

b Select Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select Off.
Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the
consumption of energy or supplies, or both.
Did the job print?
Step 2

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then resend the job
Did the job print?
Step 3
a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory.

The problem is solved. Go to step 4.

b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
Step 4
a Disable the Page Protect feature.

The problem is solved. Go to step 5.

From the printer control panel, navigate to:
>Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect >
Off
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Step 5
a Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are
secure. For more information, see the setup documentation that came
with the printer.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
Step 6
Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.
Did the job print?

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Troubleshooting

285

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
Action

Yes

Step 1
a Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size
and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, open Printing Preferences or
the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 4.

Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 4
a Check if the trays are not linked.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?

Incorrect characters print
Action

Yes

Step 1

Deactivate Hex Trace
mode.

Go to step 2.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.
Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn off the
printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode.
Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, select Standard Network or
Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.
b Resend the print job.
Do incorrect characters print?

Troubleshooting

286

Tray linking does not work
Notes:

• The trays can detect paper length.
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper
Size/Type menu.
Action

Yes

Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Open the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the same size
and type.

• Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size
of the paper loaded in each tray.

• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
Step 2
support.
a From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked.
b Resend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?

Large jobs do not collate
Action

Yes

Step 1
a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set Collate to
(1,2,3) (1,2,3).
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Did the job print and collate correctly?
Step 2
a From the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides the
setting in the Finishing menu.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Troubleshooting

287

Action

Yes

Step 3

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size
of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages
in the job.

Did the job print and collate correctly?

Unexpected page breaks occur
Action

Yes

Increase the printing timeout.
a From the home screen, navigate to:

The problem is solved. Check the original file
for manual page
breaks.

> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
b Increase the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit.

c Resend the print job.
Did the file print correctly?

Print quality problems
Characters have jagged or uneven edges

Action

Yes

Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Print a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported
by the printer.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.

b Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you
want to use. For more information, contact your system support
person.
c Resend the print job.
Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?

No
The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting

Action

288

Yes

Contact customer
Step 2
a Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you support.
want to use on your computer. For more information, contact your
system support person.
b Resend the print job.

No
The problem is solved.

Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?

Printer is printing blank pages

Action

Yes

Step 1
a Check if there is packing material left on the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

Go to step 2.

The problem is solved.

Go to step 3.

The problem is solved.

2 Check if the packing material is properly removed from the imaging
unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b Resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Step 2
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b Resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?

Troubleshooting

289

Action

Yes

Step 3

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Yes

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?

Clipped pages or images
Leading edge

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge

Action

Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved.

Is the page or image clipped?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Go to step 3.

Do one or more of the
following:

• Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.

Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray?

• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting

290

Action

Yes

Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

2 Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?

Prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected
Note: This problem occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain the highest
projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended.
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Set the paper type to
Transparency.

From the printer control panel, make sure the paper type setting is set to
Transparency.
Is the paper type setting correct?
Step 2

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Reduce the toner darkness, and then resend the print job.
Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Make sure you are using a recommended type of color transparency, and
then resend the print job.
Step 3

Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?

Shadow images appear on prints
Leading edge

A
AB
BC
CD
D
A
B
C
D
ABCD
Trailing edge

Troubleshooting

291

Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Load paper with the
correct paper type and
weight in the tray.

Go to step 3.

Change the paper
loaded in the tray to
match the paper type
and weight specified in
the tray settings.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Action

Yes

Step 1
Check if Allow Background Removal is set to Off.
a From the General Settings menu, set Allow Background Removal to
On.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?

Gray background on prints
Leading edge

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE

Trailing edge

Did the background disappear from the prints?

Troubleshooting

292

Action

Yes

Step 2

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Adjust the toner darkness to a lighter setting.
a From the Quality Menu, select a lower value to reduce toner density.

• 4 is the factory default setting.
• If Print Mode is set to Black Only, then a setting of 5 increases toner
density and darkness for all print jobs.
b Resend the print job.
Did the background disappear from the prints?
Step 3

The problem is solved. Go to step 4.

Reinstall the toner cartridge.
a Remove the cartridge.

b Install the cartridge.
c Resend the print job.
Did the background disappear from the prints?
Step 4
Check if off-white background is selected.
a Depending on your operating system, set off-white background from
Print Properties or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Did the background disappear from the prints?

Incorrect margins on prints

ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Action

Yes

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 1
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper size loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Are the margins correct?

Troubleshooting

293

Action

Yes

Step 2

Go to step 3.

Do one or more of the
following:

From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu to
match the paper loaded in the tray.

• Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.

Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Are the margins correct?

Paper curl
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Adjust the width and
length guides.

Go to step 3.

Specify the paper type
and weight from the
tray settings to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

Go to step 5.

The problem is solved.

Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for
the size of the paper loaded.
Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Step 4
a Remove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.

b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?

Troubleshooting

294

Action

Yes

Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Yes

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?

Print irregularities
Leading edge

)
)
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE

Trailing edge

Action

Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved.

Do print irregularities still appear?
Step 2

Go to step 3.

Specify the paper size
and type from the tray
settings to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded in
the tray?
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

From the printer
Go to step 5.
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.

Troubleshooting

295

Action

Yes

Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.

Go to step 6.

The problem is solved.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?

Contact customer
The problem is solved.
support at
http://support.lexmar
k.com or your service
representative.

Repeating defects appear on prints

Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Measure the distance between the defects.
Check for a distance between the defects that equals:

• 97 mm (3.82 in.)
• 47 mm (1.85 in.)
• 38 mm (1.5 in.)
Is the distance between defects equal to one of the listed measurements?

Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do the repeating defects still appear?

1 Check if the
distance between
the defects equal
to 80 mm (3.15 in.)
2 Take note of the
distance, and then
contact customer
support at
http://support.le
xmark.com or
your service
representative.

The problem is solved.
Contact customer
support at
http://support.lexma
rk.com or your service
representative.

Troubleshooting

296

Print is too dark

Action

Yes

Go to step 2.
Step 1
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner
darkness.

No
The problem is solved.

Note: 8 is the factory default setting.

b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
a From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture and weight
in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?

Do one or more of the
following:

• Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.

• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
type, texture and
weight specified in
the tray settings.
Go to step 4.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved.

Is the print still too dark?
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

From the printer
Go to step 5.
control panel, change
the texture settings in
the Paper Texture
menu to match the
paper you are printing
on.

Troubleshooting

297

Action

Yes

Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.

Go to step 6.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Yes

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?

Print is too light

Action

Go to step 2.
Step 1
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase the toner
darkness.

The problem is solved.

Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Step 2

Go to step 3.

Change the paper type,
texture, and weight to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.

Go to step 4.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved.

From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?

Is the print still too light?

Troubleshooting

298

Action

Yes

Step 4

From the printer
Go to step 5.
control panel, change
the texture settings in
the Paper Texture
menu to match the
paper you are printing
on.

Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.

Go to step 6.

The problem is solved.

Go to step 7.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Step 6
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Step 7
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?

Skewed print

)E
) D
ABC
E
ABCD E
ABCD

Troubleshooting

Action

299

Yes

Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.

No
The problem is solved.

Is the print still skewed?
Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Action

Yes

Step 1
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

Go to step 2.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Step 2
a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray.

b Resend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?

Printer is printing solid black pages

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b Resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?

Troubleshooting

300

Transparency print quality is poor
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Set the paper type to
Transparency.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Yes

From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper menu to
match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?
Step 2
a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency.

b Resend the print job.
Is the print quality still poor?

Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action

Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Step 2

Go to step 3.

Change the paper type
and weight to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Step 3
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Troubleshooting

301

Action

Yes

Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

Go to step 5.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Yes

b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
Leading edge

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge

Action

Go to step 2.
Step 1
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved.

Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?

Go to step 3.

Do one or more of the
following:

• Specify the paper
texture, type, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.

• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
texture, type, and
weight specified in
the tray settings.

Troubleshooting

302

Action

Yes

Step 3
a Load paper from a fresh package.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

Go to step 5.

The problem is solved.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?

The problem is solved.
Contact customer
support at
http://support.lexmar
k.com or your service
representative.

Horizontal voids appear on prints
Leading edge

Trailing edge

Action

Yes

Step 1
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.

Go to step 2.

The problem is solved.

Step 2
Go to step 3.
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.

The problem is solved.

b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

Troubleshooting

303

Action

Yes

Step 3
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Action

Yes

Step 1
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.

Go to step 2.

The problem is solved.

Step 2
Go to step 3.
a From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved.

b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

Vertical voids appear on prints
Leading edge

Trailing edge

b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 3
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.

b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting

304

Action

Yes

Step 4
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

Go to step 5.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Action

Yes

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

The problem is solved.

b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Toner specks appear on prints

Do toner specks appear on prints?

Toner fog or background shading appears on prints

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE

Reinstall the imaging unit.
a Remove, and then install the imaging unit.

b Resend the print job.
Does fog or shading appear on prints?

Troubleshooting

305

Action

Yes

Step 2

The problem is solved.
Contact customer
support at
http://support.lexmar
k.com or your service
representative.

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Does fog or shading appear on prints?

Toner rubs off
Leading edge

ABC
DEF
Trailing edge

Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Specify the paper type
and weight from the
tray settings to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.

From the Paper menu
on the printer control
panel, set the paper
texture.

Contact customer
support.

Action

Yes

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type
and weight.
Do the paper type and texture match the paper loaded in the tray?
Step 2
Check if you are printing on paper with texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

Uneven print density

Is the print density uneven?

Solving copy problems
• “Copier does not respond” on page 306

Troubleshooting

306

• “Scanner unit does not close” on page 306
• “Poor copy quality” on page 307
• “Partial document or photo copies” on page 308

Copier does not respond
Action

Yes

Step 1

Clear the error or status Go to step 2.
message.

Check if an error or status message appears on the display.

Does an error or status message appear?
Step 2

Go to step 3.

Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.

Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.

Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 3
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it back
on.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?

Scanner unit does not close
Action

Yes

Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and the
printer.
a Lift the scanner unit.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

b Remove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close properly?

Troubleshooting

307

Poor copy quality
Action

Yes

Step 1

Clear the error or status Go to step 2.
message.

Check if an error or status message appears on the display.

Does an error or status message appear?
Step 2

Go to step 3.

Increase the scan
resolution setting for a
higher‑quality output.

Go to step 4.

See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 224.

Go to step 5.

See “Print quality
problems” on
page 287.

Go to step 6.

Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.

Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Step 3
If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and the ADF
glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Step 4
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
a From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.

b From the Copy menu, adjust the toner darkness.
c If the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Step 5
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 6

The problem is solved. Go to step 7.

Increase the scan resolution setting for a higher‑quality output.
Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?
Step 7
Go to step 8.
Check the copy settings.
From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content Source
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?

Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.

Troubleshooting

308

Action

Yes

Step 8

Go to step 9.

The problem is solved.

Go to step 10.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.

Check for patterns on print.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > select a lower
setting
b On the Copy screen, make sure no scaling is being selected.
Do patterns appear on prints?
Step 9
Check for missing or faded text on prints.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
b Adjust the settings:

• Improve sharpness—Increase the sharpness setting.
• Remove background—Reduce the current background removal
setting.

• Increase contrast—Increase the current setting.
• Decrease shadow—Reduce the current setting.
Do prints have missing or faded text?
Step 10
Check for washed‑out or overexposed output.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging

b Adjust the settings of the following:
• Background removal—Reduce the current setting.
• Shadow detail—Reduce the current background removal setting.
c Resend the copy job.
Do pages show washed‑out or overexposed prints?

Partial document or photo copies

Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

Troubleshooting

309

Action

Yes

Step 2

Go to step 3.

Change the paper size
setting to match the
paper loaded in the
tray, or load the tray
with paper that
matches the paper size
setting.

Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the
tray.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper
Size setting.
Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
Step 3
support.
a Specify the paper size. Depending on your operating system, specify
the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do copies print properly?

Solving fax problems
•
•
•
•
•
•

“Fax and e-mail functions are not set up” on page 309
“Caller ID is not shown” on page 310
“Cannot send or receive a fax” on page 310
“Can send but not receive faxes” on page 312
“Can receive but not send faxes” on page 313
“Received fax has poor print quality” on page 314

Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
Notes:

• Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.
• The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e‑mail.
Action

Yes

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes >
Submit
b Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer display.

c
d
e
f

Select a language, and then touch

Select a country or region, and then touch Next.
Select a time zone, and then touch Next.
Select Fax and E‑mail, and then touch Next.

Are fax and e‑mail functions set up?

Troubleshooting

310

Caller ID is not shown
Action

Yes

Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is
subscribed to the caller ID service.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Notes:

• If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you may
have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).

• The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends on
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID
patterns.

• Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or
switch setting to use.
Does the caller ID appear?

Cannot send or receive a fax
Action

Yes

Step 1

Clear the error or status Go to step 2.
message.

Check if an error or status message appears on the display.

Is there an error or status message on the display?
Step 2

Go to step 3.

Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.

Go to step 4.

Turn on the printer,
and then wait until
Ready appears on the
display.

Go to step 5.

Securely connect the
cables.

Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 3
Check the power.
Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears
on the display.
Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?
Step 4
Check the printer connections.
If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following
equipment are secure:

• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine
Are the cable connections secure?

Troubleshooting

311

Action

Yes

Step 5
a Check the telephone wall jack.
1 Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.

The problem is solved. Go to step 6.

2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone cable
into the wall jack.

4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone cable
into a different wall jack.

5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 6

Go to step 7.

Connect the printer to
an analog phone
service or the correct
digital connector.

Go to step 8.

• Try calling the fax

Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct
digital connector.
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected
to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.

• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the
printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an
ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an Rinterface port, contact your ISDN provider.

• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will
support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL
provider.

• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are
connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If none exists, then
consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital
connector?
Step 7
Check for a dial tone.
Did you hear a dial tone?

number to make
sure that it is
working properly.

• If the telephone
line is being used by
another device,
then wait until the
other device is
finished before
sending a fax.

• If you are using the
On Hook Dial
feature, then turn
up the volume to
check if you hear a
dial tone.

Troubleshooting

312

Action

Yes

Step 8

The problem is solved. Go to step 9.

Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering machines,
computers with modems, or telephone line splitters) between the printer
and the telephone line, and then try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Go to step 10.
Step 9
a Temporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone company to
obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Go to step 11.
Step 10
a Temporarily disable voice mail service. For more information, contact
your telephone company.
Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then
consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 11
Scan the original document one page at a time.
a Dial the fax number.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

b Scan the document one page at a time.
Can you send or receive a fax?

Can send but not receive faxes
Action

Yes

Step 1

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Check the tray or feeder.
If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
Can you receive faxes?

Troubleshooting

313

Action

Yes

Step 2

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Check the ring count delay settings.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.

b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you want
the phone to ring before the printer answers.
d Click Submit.
Can you receive faxes?
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that came with the supply.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Can you receive faxes?

Can receive but not send faxes
Action

Yes

Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Check if the printer is in Fax mode.
From the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode, and
then send the fax.
Note: The Multi Send application does not support the XPS output type.
To use XPS, use the regular faxing method.
Can you send faxes?
Step 2
Load the original document properly.
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray
or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray.
Place these items on the scanner glass.
Can you send faxes?

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Troubleshooting

314

Action

Yes

Step 3

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Set up the shortcut number properly.

• Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone number
that you want to dial.

• Dial the telephone number manually.
Can you send faxes?

Received fax has poor print quality
Action

Yes

Step 1

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
a Check if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.

b Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
c Resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Step 2
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.

b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 14400
• 33600
d Click Submit, and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

Troubleshooting

315

Action

Yes

Step 3

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Replace the toner cartridge.
When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the cartridge,
and then resend the fax.

Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

Solving scanner problems
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

“The scanner does not respond” on page 315
“Scan job was not successful” on page 316
“Scanner unit does not close” on page 317
“Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer” on page 317
“Poor scanned image quality” on page 318
“Partial document or photo scans” on page 319
“Cannot scan from a computer” on page 319

The scanner does not respond
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Turn on the printer.

Go to step 3.

Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print server,
option, or other
network device.

Go to step 4.

Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.

Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.

Go to step 5.

Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Step 2
Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
print server, option, or other network device?
Step 3
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 4
Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?

Troubleshooting

Action

316

Yes

Step 5

Connect the printer
Go to step 6.
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power cord directly to
a properly grounded
power supplies, or extension cords.
electrical outlet.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Step 6
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.
Are the other electrical equipment working?

Step 7
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.

Unplug the other
Go to step 7.
electrical equipment
and turn on the printer.
If the printer does not
work, then reconnect
the other electrical
equipment and then go
to step 6.
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Are the printer and scanner working?

Scan job was not successful
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Connect the cables
properly.

Change the file name.

Go to step 3.

Close the file you are
scanning.

Go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

Select the Append time
stamp or Overwrite
existing file check box
in the destination
configuration settings.

Check the cable connections.
Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the
computer and the printer.
Are the cables securely connected?
Step 2
Check if the file name is already in use.
Is the file name already in use?
Step 3
Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another
application or being used by another user.
Is the file you want to scan open in another application or being used by
another user?
Step 4
Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing file check
box is selected in the destination configuration settings.
Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box selected
in the destination configuration settings?

Troubleshooting

317

Action

Yes

Step 5

The problem is solved. Go to step 6.

From the Flash Drive menu, reduce the scan resolution settings, and then
resend the scan job.
Does the job scan?
Step 6

The problem is solved. Change the Content
Type and Content
Check the scan settings.
Source settings to
From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and Content Source
match the document
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?

Scanner unit does not close
Action

Yes

Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.
a Lift the scanner unit.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

b Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close correctly?

Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.
Close all applications that are not being used.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Step 2
Select a lower scan resolution.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?

Troubleshooting

318

Poor scanned image quality
Action

Yes

Step 1

Clear the error
message.

Go to step 2.

Go to step 3.

Increase the scan
resolution settings for a
higher‑quality output.

Go to step 4.

See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 224.

Go to step 5.

Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.

Go to step 6.

See “Print quality
problems” on
page 287.

Problem solved.

Go to step 7.

Contact customer
support.

Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.

Check if an error message appears on the display.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Step 3
Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint‑free cloth
dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Step 4
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 5
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.

• From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
• From the Copy menu, adjust the toner darkness.
• When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Step 6
Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher‑quality output.
Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?
Step 7
Check the scan settings.
From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and Content Source
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?

Troubleshooting

319

Partial document or photo scans
Action

Yes

Check the placement of the document or photo.
Contact customer
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner support.
glass in the upper left corner.

No
Load the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.

Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

Cannot scan from a computer
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 3.

Go to step 2.

Clear the error
message.

Go to step 3.

Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the printer
display before scanning a job.
Does Ready appear before scanning the job?
Step 2
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Contact customer
support.
Check the cable connections between the printer and the print server to
make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with
the printer.
Step 3

Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server
secure?

Tighten the cable
connections.

Troubleshooting

320

Solving home screen applications problems
An application error has occurred
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Contact customer
support.

Check the system log for relevant details.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

• View the IP address on the printer home screen.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
b Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab > Log.

c From the Filter menu, select an application status.
d From the Application menu, select an application, and then click
Submit.
Does an error message appear in the log?
Step 2
Resolve the error.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Is the application working now?

Embedded Web Server does not open
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Type the correct
printer IP address in the
address field of your
Web browser.

Make sure the printer IP address is correct.
View the printer IP address:

• From the printer home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then

Note: Depending on
the network settings,
you may need to type
“https://” instead of
“http://” before the
printer IP address to
access the Embedded
Web Server.

finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Is the printer IP address correct?
Step 2
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?

Go to step 3.

Turn on the printer.

Troubleshooting

321

Action

Yes

Step 3

Go to step 4.

Contact your system
support person.

Go to step 5.

Tighten the cable
connection.

Go to step 6.

Contact your system
support person.

Check if the network connection is working.
Is the network connection working?
Step 4
Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with
the printer.
Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure?
Step 5
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.
Note: Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain
Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.
Are the Web proxy servers disabled?

Step 6
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP address
in the address field.
Did the Embedded Web Server open?

Contacting customer support
When you contact customer support, you will need to be able to describe the problem you are experiencing, the message
on the printer display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label at the back of the
printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem. Visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com, and then select one of the following:
Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals, support documentation, drivers, and other downloads to help you
solve common problems.
E-mail

You can send an e-mail to the Lexmark team, describing your problem. A service representative will respond
and provide you with information to solve your problem.

Live chat

You can chat directly with a service representative. They can work with you to solve your printer problem or
provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your
computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems, install updates, or complete other tasks to help
you successfully use your Lexmark product.

Telephone support is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, visit
http://support.lexmark.com.

Notices

322

Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark XM3150
Machine type:
7016
Model(s):
679

Edition notice
September 2012
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
© 2009 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4,
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.

Notices

323

Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in
the United States and/or other countries.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

•
•
•
•

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.

The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.
Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:
Director of Lexmark Technology & Services
Lexmark International, Inc.
740 West New Circle Road
Lexington, KY 40550
(859) 232–3000

Notices

324

Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing

55 dBA

Scanning

45 dBA

Copying

56 dBA

Ready

N/A dBA

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature

15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)

Shipping and storage temperature

‑40 to 60°C (-40 to 140°F)

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local
sales office phone number.

Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities
for disposal and recycling options.

Notices

325

Static sensitivity notice

This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the
metal frame of the printer.

ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.

Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I
(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is
nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.

Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:

Notices

326

DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。

Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode

Description

Power consumption (Watts)

Printing

The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs.

640 W

Copy

The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original
documents.

660 W

Scan

The product is scanning hard‑copy documents.

40 W

Ready

The product is waiting for a print job.

20 W

Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode.

Hibernate

The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode.

0.5 W

Off

The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is turned 0 W
off.

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Notices

327

Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering
power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product
is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes):

30 minutes

By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 180 minutes. Setting
the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.

Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate
Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:

• Using the Hibernate Timeout
• Using the Schedule Power modes
• Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions except for EU countries and
Switzerland

Disabled

Factory default value for this product in EU countries or regions and Switzerland

3 days

The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between
one hour and one month.

Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.

Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.

Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.

Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.

Notices

328

Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation software CD.

European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC and
2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and the ecodesign of energyrelated products.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal
equipment such as facsimile.

Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone
company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your
setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,
the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.

Notices

329

If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.

Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.

Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.

Notices

330

Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.

Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted
equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance
to Telecom's specifications:

• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual
call initiation, and

• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the
beginning of the next call attempt.

• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.

Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives
metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines
in Switzerland.

Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 80D1877)
devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé pour toute
installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.

Notices

331

Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer
80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden. Die
Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte
vorhanden sind.

Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee che
ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le
linee analogiche in Svizzera.

Notice to Users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits,
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy‑related products.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.

Modular component notice
Wireless‑equipped models contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark Regulatory Type Model Number LEX-M01-005; FCC ID:IYLLEXM01005; IC:2376A-M01005

Notices

332

Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Notice to users in Brazil
Este equipamento opera em carater secundario, isto e, nao tem direito a protecao contra interferencia prejudicial,
mesmo de estacoes do mesmo tipo, e nao pode causar interferencia a sistemas operando em carater primario.
(Res.ANATEL 282/2001).

Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.

Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.

Notices

333

Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.

Taiwan NCC RF notice statement

Notice to users in the European Union
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC,
1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio
equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy-related products.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the
laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use
within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign
of energy-related products.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.

Notices

334

This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
AT

Česky

Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.

Dansk

Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Deutsch

Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.

Ελληνική

ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.

English

Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Español

Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Eesti

Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.

Suomi

Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.

Français

Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Magyar

Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

Íslenska

Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.

Italiano

Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Latviski

Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.

Lietuvių

Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.

Malti

Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.

Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk

Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Notices

335

Polski

Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

Português

A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.

Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska

Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the countryspecific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”

Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.

Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport
Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed
when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.

Notices

336

To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest
version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies,
parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark
products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.

Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.

Notices

337

Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.

Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented
in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the
product or service.

Notices

338

The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)
implemented in the product or service.

Index

339

Index
Numerics
250‑sheet tray
installing 45
550‑sheet tray
installing 45

Symbols
[x]-page jam, remove all pages from
the finisher’s accumulator. Leave
paper in bin. [45y.xx] 255
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder.
[25y.xx] 247
[x]‑page jam, clear standard bin.
[20y.xx] 241
[x]‑page jam, open automatic
feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 241
[x]‑page jam, open front door.
[20y.xx] 243
[x]‑page jam, open rear door.
[20y.xx] 242
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x].
[24y.xx] 249
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear
duplex. [23y.xx] 246

A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 22
Active NIC menu 152
adapter plug 118
ADF
copying using 91
ADF separator roller
ordering 226
adjusting brightness
Embedded Web Server 216
printer control panel 216
adjusting copy quality 96
adjusting display brightness 216
adjusting Sleep mode 214
adjusting toner darkness 84
administrator settings
Embedded Web Server 235
advanced options
fax 131
FTP 101
FTP options 139

advanced options, touch‑screen
e‑mail 108
answering machine
setting up 111
AppleTalk menu 157
applications
understanding 23
attaching cables 49
available internal options 29
avoiding jams 79
avoiding paper jams 238

B
blocking junk faxes 128
buttons, printer control panel 16
buttons, touch screen
using 19

C
cables
Ethernet 49
USB 49
canceling
print job, from computer 89
canceling a print job
from a computer 89
from the printer control panel 89
canceling an e-mail 106
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 320
Card Copy
setting up 24
card stock
loading, multipurpose feeder 65
tips 76
Cartridge low [88.xy] 259
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 260
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 260
Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch
[41.xy] 259
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 260
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load [orientation] 260
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 260

Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 260
Check tray [x] connection 261
checking an unresponsive
printer 273
checking status of parts and
supplies 225
checking the status of parts and
supplies 225
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 235
cleaning
exterior of the printer 223
scanner glass 224
cleaning the printer 223
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 261
Close front door 261
collate
copy options 101
collating copies 96
color quality troubleshooting
prints on color transparencies
appear dark when projected 290
Complex page, some data may not
have printed [39] 261
confidential data
information on securing 222
confidential jobs
modifying print settings 88
confidential print jobs 87
printing from a Macintosh
computer 88
printing from Windows 88
Confidential Print menu 163
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 262
configuration information
wireless network 53
Configure MP menu 145
configuring
supply notifications, imaging
unit 236
supply notifications, maintenance
kit 236

Index

supply notifications, toner
cartridge 236
configuring e‑mail settings 102
configuring port settings 56
configuring supply notifications 236
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 122
connecting to a wireless network
using PIN (Personal Identification
Number) method 54
using Push Button Configuration
method 54
using the Embedded Web
Server 55
using wireless setup wizard 54
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 216
conserving supplies 212
Eco‑Mode 213
Hibernate Mode 215
Hibernate Timeout 215
Quiet Mode 213
Schedule Power Modes 216
Sleep Mode 214
conserving supplies 212
contacting customer support 321
content
e‑mail settings 107
content source
e‑mail settings 107
fax options 129
content type
e‑mail settings 107
fax options 129
control panel, printer 16
indicator light 16
Sleep button light 16
controller board
accessing 30
copies
copy options 101
copy job, canceling
using the ADF 99
using the scanner glass 99
copy options
collate 101
copies 101
darkness 100
save as shortcut 101
sides (duplex) 100
copy quality
adjusting 96

340

copy screen
content source 101
content type 101
options 100
Copy Settings menu 175
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 306
partial document or photo
copies 308
poor copy quality 307
poor scanned image quality 318
scanner unit does not
close 306, 317
copying
adding an overlay message 99
adjusting quality 96
canceling a copy job 99, 100
collating copies 96
custom job 98
different paper sizes 94
enlarging 95
inserting a header or footer 99
multiple pages on one sheet 97
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 95
on letterhead 93
on transparencies 92
photos 92
placing separator sheets between
copies 97
quick copy 91
reducing 95
selecting a tray 94
to a different size 93
using the ADF 91
using the scanner glass 92
copying different paper sizes 94
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 97
copying on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 95
copying on transparencies 92
creating a fax destination shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 126
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 132
creating custom name
paper type 71
creating profiles
using the ScanBack Utility 137

custom name
configuring 72
Custom Names menu 150
custom paper type name
assigning 72
Custom Scan Sizes menu 150
Custom Type [x]
changing paper type 72
creating custom name 71
Custom Types menu 149
customer support
contacting 321

D
darkness
copy options 100
e‑mail options 107
fax options 130
scan options 138
date and time, fax
setting 123
daylight saving time, setting 123
Default Source menu 141
Defective flash detected [51] 262
delayed send
fax options 130
different paper sizes, copying 94
Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
fax setup 115
digital telephone service
fax setup 117
directory list
printing 89
Disk full 62 262
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 262
disk wiping 220
Disk Wiping menu 163
display troubleshooting
printer display is blank 275
display, printer control panel 16
adjusting brightness 216
disposing of printer hard disk 219
distinctive ring service, fax
connecting to 122
documents, printing
from Macintosh 84
from Windows 84
DSL filter 115
duplexing 95

Index

E
Eco‑Mode setting 213
Edit Security Setups menu 161
Embedded Web Server
accessing 14, 22
administrator settings 235
checking the status of parts 225
checking the status of
supplies 225
creating a fax destination
shortcut 126
creating an FTP shortcut 132
creating e‑mail shortcuts 103
functions 14
initial fax setup 110
modifying confidential print
settings 88
networking settings 235
problem accessing 320
scanning to a computer using 134
setting up e‑mail alerts 235
using 14
Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide
where to find 222, 235
emission
notices 323, 324, 327, 328, 332,
333
encrypting the printer hard
disk 221
enlarging a copy 95
envelopes
loading, multipurpose feeder 65
tips 74
environmental settings
conserving supplies 212
display brightness, adjusting 216
Eco‑Mode 213
Hibernate Mode 215
Hibernate Timeout 215
Quiet Mode 213
Schedule Power Modes 216
Sleep Mode 214
erasing hard disk memory 220
erasing non‑volatile memory 220
erasing volatile memory 219
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 262
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 262

341

Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 51
Ethernet network setup
using Macintosh 51
using Windows 51
Ethernet networking
Macintosh 51
Windows 51
Ethernet port 49
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 51
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 27
exterior of the printer
cleaning 223
e‑mail
canceling 106
e‑mail alerts
low supply levels 235
paper jam 235
setting up 235
e‑mail function
setting up 102
e‑mail options
darkness 107
message 106
original size 106
page setup 108
recipient(s) 106
resolution 107
send as 107
subject 106
e‑mail screen
advanced options 108
options 106, 108
E‑mail Settings menu 186
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 103
e‑mail, sending
using a shortcut number 104
using the address book 105
e‑mailing
adding message line 105
adding subject line 105
changing output file type 105
configuring e‑mail settings 102
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 103

creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 103
setting up e‑mail function 102
using a shortcut number 104
using the address book 105
using the printer control
panel 104

F
factory defaults
restoring 237
fax
sending 124, 125
fax and e‑mail functions
setting up 309
fax and e‑mail functions are not set
up 309
fax log
viewing 127
Fax memory full 263
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 178
fax name, setting 122
fax number, setting 122
fax options
content source 129
content type 129
darkness 130
delayed send 130
page setup 130
resolution 130
scan preview 131
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 263
fax ports 49
fax screen
advanced options 131
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system administrator. 263
fax setup
country‑ or region‑specific 118
digital telephone service 117
DSL connection 115
standard telephone line
connection 111
VoIP 116
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system administrator. 263
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system administrator. 263
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 310

Index

can receive but not send
faxes 313
can send but not receive
faxes 312
cannot send or receive a fax 310
received fax has poor print
quality 314
faxing
blocking junk faxes 128
canceling a fax job 128
changing resolution 127
configuring the printer to observe
daylight saving time 123
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 126
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 126
distinctive ring service 122
fax setup 110
forwarding faxes 129
holding faxes 128
making a fax lighter or darker 127
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 125
sending using the printer control
panel 123
setting the date and time 123
setting the fax number 122
setting the outgoing fax name 122
viewing a fax log 127
FCC notices 323, 328, 332
file name
scan options 137
finding more information about the
printer 10
finding printer IP address 22
finisher
finishing features 81
supported paper sizes 81
finisher features 81
Finishing menu 200
firmware card 29
flash drive
printing from 85
Flash Drive menu 194
flash drives
supported file types 86
font sample list
printing 89
Forms and Favorites
setting up 23
forwarding faxes 129

342

FTP
FTP options 137
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 133
FTP address, scanning to
using a shortcut number 133
using the printer control
panel 133
FTP options
advanced options 139
FTP 137
FTP screen
advanced options 101
FTP Settings menu 191

G
General Settings menu 166
green settings
Eco‑Mode 213
Hibernate Mode 215
Hibernate Timeout 215
Quiet Mode 213
Schedule Power Modes 216

H
held jobs 87
printing from a Macintosh
computer 88
printing from Windows 88
Help menu 210
Hibernate Mode
using 215
Hibernate Timeout
setting 215
hiding icons on the home screen 22
holding faxes 128
home screen
customizing 22
hiding icons 22
showing icons 22
home screen applications
configuring 23
finding information 23
home screen buttons and icons
description 17
HTML menu 209

I
icons on the home screen
hiding 22

showing 22
Image menu 210
imaging unit
ordering 226
replacing 229
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 263
Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy] 263
Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [84.xy] 263
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 27
in finisher rear door
paper jams, clearing 250, 255
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 264
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 264
initial fax setup 110
using the Embedded Web
Server 110
inserting a header or footer 99
installing an Internal Solutions
Port 35
installing an optional card 33
installing options
order of installation 45
installing printer hard disk 41
installing printer on a network
Ethernet networking 51
installing printer software
adding options 48
installing printer software
(Windows) 48
installing the 250‑sheet tray 45
installing the 550‑sheet tray 45
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 264
Insufficient memory to collate job
[37] 264
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 265
Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 264
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored [37] 264
internal options 29
Internal Solutions Port
changing port settings 56
installing 35
troubleshooting 278

Index

IP address of computer
finding 21
IP address, printer
finding 22
IPv6 menu 156

J
jams
accessing 239
avoiding 238
understanding messages 239
jams, clearing
finisher bin 250
in automatic document feeder top
cover 241
in duplex area 246
in front door 243
in manual feeder 247
in rear door 242
in standard bin 241
in staple access door 250
in stapler door 255
in tray [x] 249
Job Accounting menu 203

L
labels, paper
tips 75
letterhead
copying on 93
loading, multipurpose feeder 65
tips on using 74
light, indicator 16
line filter 115
linking trays 71, 72
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 265
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] [paper orientation] 265
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 265
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 265
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 266
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] [paper orientation] 266
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 266

343

Load manual feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 266
loading
multipurpose feeder 65
trays 60
loading the optional tray 60
loading the standard tray 60

M
maintenance kit
ordering 226
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 266
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 267
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 267
making copies using paper from
selected tray 94
memory
types installed on printer 219
memory card 29
installing 31
troubleshooting 278
Memory full [38] 267
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 267
Memory full, cannot send
faxes 267
menu settings page
printing 59
menus
Active NIC 152
AppleTalk 157
Confidential Print 163
Configure MP 145
Copy Settings 175
Custom Names 150
Custom Scan Sizes 150
Custom Types 149
Default Source 141
Disk Wiping 163
Edit Security Setups 161
E‑mail Settings 186
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 178
Finishing 200
Flash Drive 194
FTP Settings 191
General Settings 166
Help 210
HTML 209

Image 210
IPv6 156
Job Accounting 203
list of 140
Miscellaneous Security
Settings 162
Network [x] 152
Network Card 154
Network Reports 154
Paper Loading 148
Paper Size/Type 142
Paper Texture 145
Paper Weight 147
PCL Emul 206
PDF 205
PostScript 205
Quality 202
Reports 151
Security Audit Log 164
Set Date/Time 164
Settings 199
SMTP Setup menu 160
Standard Network 152
Standard USB 158
Substitute Size 145
TCP/IP 155
Universal Setup 150
Utilities 204
Wireless 156
XPS 205
message
e‑mail options 106
Miscellaneous Security Settings
menu 162
mobile device
printing from 85
moving the printer 11, 233, 234
Multi Send
adding a profile 25
setting up 25
multipurpose feeder
loading 65
MyShortcut
about 25

N
Network [x] menu 152
Network [x] software error
[54] 267
Network Card menu 154
Network Reports menu 154

Index

network settings
Embedded Web Server 235
network setup page
printing 59
Networking Guide
where to find 235
No analog phone line connected to
modem, fax is disabled. 267
noise emission levels 324
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 268
non‑volatile memory 219
erasing 220
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 268
notices 323, 324, 325, 326, 327,
328, 329, 330, 331, 332, 333, 334
number of remaining pages
estimate 227

O
optional card
installing 33
optional tray
loading 60
options
250‑sheet tray, installing 45
550‑sheet tray, installing 45
firmware cards 29
Internal Solutions Port,
installing 35
memory card 31
memory cards 29
printer hard disk, installing 41
printer hard disk, removing 44
updating in printer driver 48
options, copy screen
copy from 100
scale 100
options, touch‑screen
copy 100
e‑mail 106, 108
ordering
imaging unit 226
maintenance kit 226
staple cartridges 226
ordering supplies
toner cartridge 225
original size
e‑mail options 106
scan options 137

344

output file type
changing 105

P
page setup
e‑mail options 108
fax options 130
scan options 139
paper
characteristics 76
different sizes, copying 94
letterhead 78
loading, multipurpose feeder 65
preprinted forms 78
recycled 78, 212
saving 97
selecting 77
storing 79
unacceptable 77
Universal size setting 60
Paper changes needed 268
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 280
paper jams
avoiding 238
paper jams, clearing
finisher bin 250
in automatic document feeder top
cover 241
in duplex area 246
in finisher rear door 250, 255
in front door 243
in manual feeder 247
in rear door 242
in standard bin 241
in staple access door 250
in stapler door 255
in tray [x] 249
paper labels
loading, multipurpose feeder 65
Paper Loading menu 148
paper size
setting 60
Paper Size/Type menu 142
paper sizes
supported 79
paper stop, using 70
Paper Texture menu 145
paper type
setting 60

paper types
supported by printer 81
where to load 81
Paper Weight menu 147
paper weights
supported by printer 81
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 268
parts
checking status 225
checking, from printer control
panel 225
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 225
using genuine Lexmark 225
PCL Emul menu 206
PDF menu 205
Personal Identification Number
method
using 54
phone splitter 116
photos
copying 92
placing separator sheets between
copies 97
port settings
configuring 56
PostScript menu 205
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 51
print irregularities 294
print job
canceling, from computer 89
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 224
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 288
characters have jagged edges 287
clipped pages or images 289
gray background on prints 291
horizontal voids appear on
prints 302
print irregularities 294
print is too dark 296
print is too light 297
printer is printing solid black
pages 299
repeating print defects appear on
prints 295
shadow images appear on
prints 290
skewed print 298

Index

streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 300
streaked vertical lines 301
toner fog or background
shading 304
toner rubs off 305
toner specks appear on prints 304
transparency print quality is
poor 300
uneven print density 305
white streaks 303
print troubleshooting
error reading flash drive 281
held jobs do not print 283
incorrect characters print 285
incorrect margins on prints 292
jammed pages are not
reprinted 280
job prints from wrong tray 285
job prints on wrong paper 285
jobs do not print 281
Large jobs do not collate 286
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 280
paper curl 293
paper frequently jams 279
print job takes longer than
expected 284
tray linking does not work 286
unexpected page breaks
occur 287
printer
basic model 12
finishing features 81
fully configured 12
minimum clearances 11
moving 11, 233, 234
selecting a location 11
shipping 234
printer configurations 12
printer control panel 16
factory defaults, restoring 237
indicator light 16
Sleep button light 16
printer control panel, virtual
display
using the Embedded Web
Server 235
Printer had to restart. Last job may
be incomplete. 269
printer hard disk
disposing of 219

345

encrypting 221
installing 41
removing 44
wiping 220
printer hard disk encryption 221
printer hard disk memory
erasing 220
printer information
where to find 10
printer IP address
finding 22
printer is printing blank pages 288
printer messages
[x]-page jam, remove all pages
from the finisher’s accumulator.
Leave paper in bin. [45y.xx] 255
[x]-page jam, remove all pages
from the output bin. Leave paper
in bin. [45y.xx] 250
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder.
[25y.xx] 247
[x]‑page jam, clear standard bin.
[20y.xx] 241
[x]‑page jam, open automatic
feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 241
[x]‑page jam, open front door.
[20y.xx] 243
[x]‑page jam, open rear door.
[20y.xx] 242
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x].
[24y.xx] 249
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to
clear duplex. [23y.xx] 246
Cartridge low [88.xy] 259
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 260
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 260
Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch
[41.xy] 259
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 260
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load
[orientation] 260
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 260
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 260
Check tray [x] connection 261

Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 261
Close front door 261
Complex page, some data may not
have printed [39] 261
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 262
Defective flash detected [51] 262
Disk full 62 262
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 262
Disk near full. Securely clearing
disk space. 262
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 262
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 262
Fax memory full 263
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 263
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 263
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 263
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 263
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 263
Imaging unit nearly low
[84.xy] 263
Imaging unit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 263
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 264
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 264
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 264
Insufficient memory to collate job
[37] 264
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 265
Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 264
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored
[37] 264

Index

Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 265
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name [paper
orientation] 265
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 265
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 265
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 266
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] [paper
orientation] 266
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 266
Load manual feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 266
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 266
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 267
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 267
Memory full [38] 267
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 267
Memory full, cannot send
faxes 267
Network [x] software error
[54] 267
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled. 267
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 268
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 268
Paper changes needed 268
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 268
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 269
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
cartridge [31.xy] 270
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
imaging unit [31.xy] 270
Remove defective disk [61] 269
Remove paper from standard
output bin 269
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 269

346

Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 269
Replace defective imaging unit
[31.xy] 269
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated
pages remain [84.xy] 269
Replace maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 269
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 270
Replace unsupported imaging unit
[32.xy] 270
Restore held jobs? 270
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 270
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 271
Scanner disabled. Contact system
administrator if problem persists.
[840.02] 271
Scanner jam, remove all originals
from the scanner [2yy.xx] 271
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 271
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 271
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 271
Some held jobs were not
restored 271
Standard network software error
[54] 271
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 272
Supply needed to complete
job 272
Too many flash options installed
[58] 272
Too many trays attached [58] 272
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 272
Unsupported disk 272
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 273
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 262
USB port [x] disabled [56] 273
Weblink server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 273

printer options troubleshooting
internal option is not
detected 276
Internal Solutions Port 278
memory card 278
tray problems 277
USB/parallel interface card 278
printer problems, solving basic 273
printer security
information on 222
printer software, installing
(Windows) 48
printing
canceling, from the printer control
panel 89
directory list 89
font sample list 89
forms 84
from a mobile device 85
from flash drive 85
from Macintosh 84
from Windows 84
menu settings page 59
network setup page 59
printing a directory list 89
printing a document 84
printing a font sample list 89
printing a menu settings page 59
printing a network setup page 59
printing confidential and other held
jobs
from a Macintosh computer 88
from Windows 88
printing forms 84
printing from a flash drive 85
printing from a mobile device 85
publications
where to find 10
Push Button Configuration method
using 54

Q
Quality menu 202
Quiet Mode 213

R
recipient(s)
e‑mail options 106
recycled paper
using 78, 212

Index

recycling
Lexmark packaging 217
Lexmark products 217
toner cartridges 217
reducing a copy 95
reducing noise 213
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
cartridge [31.xy] 270
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
imaging unit [31.xy] 270
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 27
remove all pages from the output
bin. Leave paper in bin.
[45y.xx] 250
Remove defective disk [61] 269
Remove paper from standard
output bin 269
removing printer hard disk 44
repeat print jobs 87
printing from a Macintosh
computer 88
printing from Windows 88
repeating print defects appear on
prints 295
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 269
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 269
Replace defective imaging unit
[31.xy] 269
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated
pages remain [84.xy] 269
Replace maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 269
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 270
Replace unsupported imaging unit
[32.xy] 270
replacing
imaging unit 229
toner cartridge 227
replacing supplies
staple cartridge 231
replacing the staple cartridge 231
reports
viewing 235
Reports menu 151
reserve print jobs 87
printing from a Macintosh
computer 88

347

printing from Windows 88
resolution
e‑mail options 107
fax options 130
scan options 138
resolution, fax
changing 127
Restore held jobs? 270
restoring factory default
settings 237
RJ‑11 adapter 118

S
safety information 8, 9
save as shortcut
copy options 101
scan options 137
saving paper 97
scan options
darkness 138
file name 137
original size 137
page setup 139
resolution 138
save as shortcut 137
scan preview 139
send as 138
scan preview
fax options 131
scan options 139
scan screen
content source 138
content type 138
Scan to Computer
setting up 135
Scan to Network
setting up 26
using 132
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a computer 319
partial document or photo
scans 319
scan job was not successful 316
scanner unit does not
close 306, 317
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 317
ScanBack Utility
using 137
scanner
automatic document feeder
(ADF) 15

functions 15
scanner glass 15
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 270
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 271
Scanner disabled. Contact system
administrator if problem persists.
[840.02] 271
scanner glass
cleaning 224
copying using 92
Scanner jam, remove all originals
from the scanner [2yy.xx] 271
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 271
scanning
from a flash drive 136
quick copy 91
to a computer 135
to a computer using the
Embedded Web Server 134
to an FTP address 133
scanning to a computer 135
using the Embedded Web
Server 134
scanning to a flash drive 136
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 132
using a shortcut number 133
using the address book 133
using the printer control
panel 133
scanning to network
destinations 132
Schedule Power Modes
using 216
security
modifying confidential print
settings 88
Security Audit Log menu 164
security slot 49
security Web page
where to find 222
selecting a location for the
printer 11
selecting paper 77
send as
e‑mail options 107
scan options 138

Index

sending a fax 124
sending a fax using the printer
control panel 123
sending an e‑mail using the printer
control panel 104
sending fax
using shortcuts 124
using the address book 125
sending fax at a scheduled
time 125
sending fax using the address
book 125
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 271
serial printing
setting up 57
Set Date/Time menu 164
setting
TCP/IP address 155
setting Hibernate Timeout 215
setting the fax number 122
setting the outgoing fax name 122
setting the paper size 60
setting the paper type 60
setting the Universal paper size 60
setting up e‑mail alerts 235
setting up fax
country‑ or region‑specific 118
digital telephone service 117
DSL connection 115
standard telephone line
connection 111
VoIP connection 116
setting up fax and e‑mail
functions 309
setting up serial printing 57
setting up the printer
on an Ethernet network
(Macintosh only) 51
on an Ethernet network (Windows
only) 51
Settings menu 199
shipping the printer 234
shortcuts, creating
e‑mail 103
fax destination 126
FTP address 133
FTP destination 132
showing icons on the home
screen 22
sides (duplex)
copy options 100

348

Sleep Mode
adjusting 214
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 271
SMTP Setup menu 160
Some held jobs were not
restored 271
standard bin, using 70
Standard Network menu 152
Standard network software error
54] 271
standard tray
loading 60
Standard USB menu 158
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 272
staple cartridge
replacing 231
staple cartridges
ordering 226
statement of volatility 219
status of parts
checking 225
status of supplies
checking 225
storing
paper 79
supplies 227
storing print jobs 87
streaked horizontal lines appear on
prints 300
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 301
streaks appear 303
subject and message information
adding to e‑mail 105
Substitute Size menu 145
supplies
checking status 225
checking, from printer control
panel 225
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 225
conserving 212
storing 227
using genuine Lexmark 225
using recycled paper 212
supplies, ordering
ADF separator roller 226
imaging unit 226
maintenance kit 226
staple cartridges 226

toner cartridge 225
Supply needed to complete job 272
supply notifications
configuring 236
supported flash drives 86
supported paper sizes 79

T
TCP/IP menu 155
telecommunication
notices 328, 329, 330, 331
the scanner does not respond 315
tips
card stock 76
envelopes 74
labels, paper 75
letterhead 74
transparencies 74
toner cartridge
ordering 225
replacing 227
toner cartridges
recycling 217
toner darkness
adjusting 84
Too many flash options installed
[58] 272
Too many trays attached [58] 272
touch screen
buttons 19
transparencies
copying on 92
loading, multipurpose feeder 65
tips 74
trays
linking 71, 72
loading 60
unlinking 71, 72
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 320
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 320
checking an unresponsive
printer 273
contacting customer support 321
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 309
solving basic printer
problems 273
the scanner does not respond 315

Index

troubleshooting, color quality
prints on color transparencies
appear dark when projected 290
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 306
partial document or photo
copies 308
poor copy quality 307
poor scanned image quality 318
scanner unit does not
close 306, 317
troubleshooting, display
printer display is blank 275
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 310
can receive but not send
faxes 313
can send but not receive
faxes 312
cannot send or receive a fax 310
received fax has poor print
quality 314
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 280
troubleshooting, print
error reading flash drive 281
held jobs do not print 283
incorrect characters print 285
incorrect margins on prints 292
jammed pages are not
reprinted 280
job prints from wrong tray 285
job prints on wrong paper 285
jobs do not print 281
Large jobs do not collate 286
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 280
paper curl 293
paper frequently jams 279
print job takes longer than
expected 284
tray linking does not work 286
unexpected page breaks
occur 287
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 288
characters have jagged edges 287
clipped pages or images 289
gray background on prints 291
horizontal voids appear on
prints 302

349

print irregularities 294
print is too dark 296
print is too light 297
printer is printing solid black
pages 299
repeating print defects appear on
prints 295
shadow images appear on
prints 290
skewed print 298
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 300
streaked vertical lines 301
toner fog or background
shading 304
toner rubs off 305
toner specks appear on prints 304
transparency print quality is
poor 300
uneven print density 305
white streaks on a page 303
troubleshooting, printer options
internal option is not
detected 276
Internal Solutions Port 278
memory card 278
tray problems 277
USB/parallel interface card 278
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a computer 319
partial document or photo
scans 319
scan job was not successful 316
scanner unit does not
close 306, 317
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 317

U
unacceptable paper 77
understanding the home screen
buttons and icons 17
uneven print density 305
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 272
Universal Paper Size
setting 60
Universal paper size
setting 60
Universal Setup menu 150
unlinking trays 71, 72

Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 273
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 262
updating options in printer
driver 48
USB port 49
USB port [x] disabled [56] 273
USB/parallel interface card
troubleshooting 278
using a shortcut number
scanning to an FTP address 133
using Forms and Favorites 84
using Hibernate Mode 215
using Schedule Power Modes 216
using shortcuts
sending fax 124
using the address book 105
sending fax 125
using the Embedded Web
Server 14
using the ScanBack Utility 137
using the touch‑screen buttons 19
Utilities menu 204

V
verify print jobs 87
printing from a Macintosh
computer 88
printing from Windows 88
vertical voids appear 303
viewing
reports 235
viewing a fax log 127
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 235
voice mail
setting up 111
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
fax setup 116
voids appear 303
VoIP adapter 116
volatile memory 219
erasing 219
volatility
statement of 219

W
Weblink server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 273

Index

wiping the printer hard disk 220
Wireless menu 156
wireless network
configuration information 53
wireless network setup
using the Embedded Web
Server 55
wireless setup wizard
using 54

X
XPS menu 205

350

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Format                          : application/pdf
Description                     : XM3100 Series
Title                           : User's Guide
Creator                         : Lexmark International, Inc.
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.5.2 (Windows)
Keywords                        : v22864537
Creator Tool                    : AH Formatter V5.3 MR1 (5,3,2011,0610) for Windows
Modify Date                     : 2012:09:05 17:03:21-04:00
Create Date                     : 2012:09:05 17:03:21-04:00
Document ID                     : uuid:1dde000e-acc4-4189-a28e-24c705a585d3
Instance ID                     : uuid:ed9dad83-da2f-42ce-948c-a8e48bfcb10f
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 350
Author                          : Lexmark International, Inc.
Subject                         : XM3100 Series

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Lexmark Scanner Xm3100 Users Manual User's Guide

Lexmark-Lexmark-Xm3150-Owner-S-Manual lexmark-lexmark-xm3150-owner-s-manual

XM3100 to the manual 13506927-1f14-4b74-941b-28f2823d88d3

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation